Senate
Study
Bill
3009
-
Introduced
SENATE/HOUSE
FILE
_____
BY
(PROPOSED
GOVERNOR’S
BILL)
A
BILL
FOR
An
Act
relating
to
programs
and
activities
under
the
purview
of
1
the
department
of
education,
the
state
board
of
education,
2
the
board
of
educational
examiners,
school
districts,
3
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools;
and
providing
for
the
4
retention
of
certain
fees
and
for
the
use
of
certain
funds.
5
BE
IT
ENACTED
BY
THE
GENERAL
ASSEMBLY
OF
THE
STATE
OF
IOWA:
6
TLSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
DIVISION
I
1
COMPETENCY-BASED
INSTRUCTION
2
Section
1.
Section
256.7,
subsection
26,
paragraph
a,
3
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
following
new
4
subparagraph:
5
NEW
SUBPARAGRAPH
.
(02)
The
rules
shall
allow
a
school
6
district
or
accredited
nonpublic
school
to
award
high
school
7
credit
to
a
student
upon
the
demonstration
of
required
8
competencies
for
a
course
or
content
area,
as
approved
by
9
an
appropriately
licensed
teacher.
The
school
district
or
10
accredited
nonpublic
school
shall
determine
the
assessment
11
methods
by
which
a
student
demonstrates
sufficient
evidence
of
12
the
required
competencies.
13
Sec.
2.
Section
256.11,
subsection
5,
unnumbered
paragraph
14
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
15
In
grades
nine
through
twelve,
a
unit
of
credit
consists
16
of
a
course
or
equivalent
related
components
or
partial
units
17
taught
throughout
the
academic
year.
The
minimum
program
to
be
18
offered
and
taught
for
grades
nine
through
twelve
is:
19
Sec.
3.
Section
256.11,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
20
following
new
subsection:
21
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
5A.
a.
As
used
in
subsection
5,
“unit”
22
means
a
course
which
meets
one
of
the
following
criteria:
23
(1)
The
course
is
taught
for
at
least
two
hundred
minutes
24
per
week
for
thirty-six
weeks.
25
(2)
The
course
is
taught
for
the
equivalent
of
one
hundred
26
twenty
hours
of
instruction.
27
b.
A
student
shall
receive
a
unit
of
credit
or
a
partial
28
unit
of
credit
upon
successful
completion
of
a
course
29
which
meets
one
of
the
criteria
in
paragraph
“a”
or
related
30
components
equivalent
to
a
course
which
meets
one
of
the
31
criteria
in
paragraph
“a”
.
A
partial
unit
of
credit
shall
be
32
calculated
in
a
manner
consistent
with
this
subsection.
A
33
student
may
receive
credit
on
a
performance
basis
through
the
34
administration
of
an
assessment,
provided
the
assessment
covers
35
-1-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
1/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
the
competencies
ordinarily
included
in
the
regular
course.
1
DIVISION
II
2
CORE
CURRICULUM
FRAMEWORK
AND
CORE
CONTENT
STANDARDS
3
Sec.
4.
Section
256.7,
subsection
26,
paragraph
a,
Code
4
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
5
a.
Adopt
rules
that
establish
a
core
curriculum
and
high
6
school
graduation
requirements
for
all
students
in
school
7
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
that
include
at
a
8
minimum
satisfactory
completion
of
four
years
of
English
and
9
language
arts,
three
years
of
mathematics,
three
years
of
10
science,
and
three
years
of
social
studies.
11
(1)
The
rules
establishing
high
school
graduation
12
requirements
shall
authorize
a
school
district
or
13
accredited
nonpublic
school
to
consider
that
any
student
who
14
satisfactorily
completes
a
high
school-level
unit
of
English
15
or
language
arts,
mathematics,
science,
or
social
studies
has
16
satisfactorily
completed
a
unit
of
the
high
school
graduation
17
requirements
for
that
area
as
specified
in
this
lettered
18
paragraph
“a”
,
and
shall
authorize
the
school
district
or
19
accredited
nonpublic
school
to
issue
high
school
credit
for
the
20
unit
to
the
student.
21
(2)
The
rules
establishing
a
core
curriculum
shall
address
22
the
core
content
standards
in
subsection
28
and
the
skills
and
23
knowledge
students
need
to
be
successful
in
the
twenty-first
24
century
.
The
core
curriculum
shall
include
,
including
but
not
25
limited
to
English
and
language
arts,
mathematics,
science,
26
social
studies
and
twenty-first
century
learning
skills
which
27
include
but
are
not
limited
to
,
music
and
other
fine
arts,
28
applied
arts,
foreign
languages,
physical
education,
character
29
education,
entrepreneurship
education,
civic
literacy,
30
health
literacy,
technology
literacy,
financial
literacy,
and
31
employability
skills;
and
shall
address
the
curricular
needs
of
32
students
in
kindergarten
through
grade
twelve
in
those
areas.
33
The
department
shall
further
define
the
twenty-first
century
34
learning
skills
components
by
rule.
35
-2-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
2/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
Sec.
5.
Section
256.9,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
1
adding
the
following
new
subsections:
2
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
62.
Appoint
members
to
the
core
curriculum
3
framework
and
core
content
standards
advisory
council
4
established
in
section
256.41.
The
director
may
establish
5
objectives
for
the
council
in
accordance
with
section
256.41.
6
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
63.
a.
Create
and
disseminate
to
school
7
districts,
charter
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
8
a
model
curriculum
that
is
directly
tied
to
the
goals,
9
outcomes,
and
assessment
strategies
identified
in
the
core
10
content
standards.
The
model
curriculum
shall
identify
a
11
developmentally
appropriate
scope
and
sequence
of
instruction
12
applicable
to
the
core
content
standards,
instructional
13
material
resources,
and
teaching
and
assessment
strategies.
14
The
model
curriculum
shall
provide
guidance
to
school
districts
15
and
schools
and
expand
on
the
core
content
standards.
The
16
model
curriculum
shall
be
modified
as
necessary
to
incorporate
17
the
core
curriculum
framework
developed
pursuant
to
paragraph
18
“b”
.
19
b.
Develop
by
July
1,
2015,
a
core
curriculum
framework
20
aligned
to
the
core
curriculum
standards
established
pursuant
21
to
section
256.7,
subsection
26.
22
Sec.
6.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.41
Core
curriculum
framework
and
23
core
content
standards
advisory
council.
24
1.
A
core
curriculum
framework
and
core
content
standards
25
advisory
council
is
established
under
the
department.
26
2.
The
advisory
council
shall
consist
of
no
less
than
seven
27
members
appointed
by
the
director
in
accordance
with
sections
28
69.16,
69.16A,
and
69.16C.
Members
shall
serve
at
the
pleasure
29
of
the
director.
30
3.
The
department
is
the
primary
agency
responsible
for
31
providing
administrative
personnel
and
services
for
the
32
advisory
council.
33
4.
Members
shall
elect
a
chair
annually
and
other
officers
34
as
the
members
determine.
Members
shall
establish
rules
of
35
-3-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
3/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
procedure
for
the
advisory
council.
1
5.
The
advisory
council
shall
meet
at
least
quarterly
and
at
2
the
call
of
the
chair.
3
6.
Members
of
the
advisory
council
shall
serve
without
4
compensation
but
may
be
reimbursed
for
actual
expenses
incurred
5
in
the
performance
of
their
duties.
6
7.
The
advisory
council
shall
review
the
core
curriculum,
7
the
core
content
standards,
and
the
model
curriculum
adopted
8
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsections
26,
28,
and
63
upon
9
request
of
the
director
and
make
recommendations
to
the
10
director
regarding
a
core
curriculum
framework
and
any
11
necessary
changes
to
the
core
curriculum
content
standards
and
12
model
curriculum.
In
making
recommendations,
the
advisory
13
council
shall
seek
to
further
the
goals
of
the
core
content
14
standards
and
any
objectives
established
by
the
director.
15
DIVISION
III
16
PARENT
ADVOCACY
NETWORK
17
Sec.
7.
Section
256.9,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
18
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
19
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
66.
Establish
a
statewide
parent
20
advocacy
network
to
create
an
integrated,
accessible
set
of
21
community-wide
resources
to
support
learning
and
development
22
by
July
1,
2013.
The
statewide
parent
advocacy
network
shall
23
include
at
least
one
parent
representative
from
each
school
24
district
in
the
state.
The
director
shall
coordinate
with
the
25
board
of
directors
of
each
public
school
district
to
facilitate
26
the
establishment
and
maintenance
of
the
statewide
parent
27
advocacy
network.
28
Sec.
8.
NEW
SECTION
.
279.68
Statewide
parent
advocacy
29
network.
30
The
board
of
directors
of
each
public
school
district
shall
31
coordinate
with
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
to
32
facilitate
the
establishment
and
maintenance
of
a
statewide
33
parent
advocacy
network
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
34
66.
The
board
of
directors
of
each
public
school
district
35
-4-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
4/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
shall
assist
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
in
1
identifying
at
least
one
representative
from
each
school
2
district
in
the
state
to
serve
on
the
statewide
parent
advocacy
3
network.
4
DIVISION
IV
5
TEACHER
AND
ADMINISTRATOR
PERFORMANCE
6
Sec.
9.
Section
256.7,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
7
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
8
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
31.
a.
By
January
1,
2013,
adopt
rules
9
establishing
Iowa
teaching
and
administration
standards
10
that
are
aligned
with
best
practices
and
nationally
accepted
11
standards.
12
b.
By
July
1,
2013,
adopt
by
rule
statewide
teacher
13
evaluation
system
and
statewide
administrator
evaluation
system
14
pilot
programs
which
shall
be
implemented
during
the
2013-2014
15
school
year.
This
paragraph
is
repealed
July
1,
2015.
16
Sec.
10.
Section
256.9,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
17
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
18
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
64.
a.
Develop
a
statewide
teacher
19
evaluation
system
and
a
statewide
administrator
evaluation
20
system
that
school
districts,
charter
schools,
and
accredited
21
nonpublic
schools
shall
use
to
standardize
the
instruments
22
and
processes
used
to
evaluate
teachers
and
administrators
23
throughout
the
state.
24
b.
The
components
of
the
statewide
teacher
evaluation
system
25
shall
include
but
not
be
limited
to
the
following:
26
(1)
Direct
observation
of
classroom
teaching
behaviors.
27
(2)
Strong
consideration
of
student
outcome
measures,
when
28
available
for
tested
subjects
and
grades,
to
validate
direct
29
observation
of
classroom
teaching
behaviors.
30
(3)
Integration
of
the
Iowa
teaching
standards.
31
(4)
System
applicability
to
teachers
in
all
content
areas
32
taught
in
a
school.
33
Sec.
11.
Section
284.3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
34
following
new
subsection:
35
-5-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
5/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
4.
This
section
is
repealed
July
1,
2013.
1
Sec.
12.
Section
284.4,
subsection
1,
paragraph
e,
Code
2
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
3
e.
(1)
Adopt
a
teacher
evaluation
plan
that,
at
minimum,
4
requires
a
an
annual
performance
review
of
teachers
in
the
5
district
at
least
once
every
three
years
based
upon
the
Iowa
6
teaching
standards
and
individual
professional
development
7
plans
in
accordance
with
section
284.8
,
and
requires
8
administrators
to
complete
evaluator
training
in
accordance
9
with
section
284.10
.
10
(2)
Adopt,
by
July
1,
2014,
the
statewide
teacher
evaluation
11
system
developed
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
64.
12
However,
the
school
district
may
develop
and
submit
to
the
13
department
for
approval
an
alternative
teacher
evaluation
14
system
that
meets
local
and
state
educational
goals.
In
lieu
15
of
the
statewide
teacher
evaluation
system,
the
school
district
16
may
adopt
and
implement
the
alternative
teacher
evaluation
17
system
upon
receiving
approval
from
the
department.
18
Sec.
13.
Section
284.8,
subsections
1
and
2,
Code
2011,
are
19
amended
to
read
as
follows:
20
1.
A
school
district
shall
provide
for
an
annual
21
review
a
of
each
teacher’s
performance
at
least
once
every
22
three
years
for
purposes
of
assisting
teachers
in
making
23
continuous
improvement,
documenting
continued
competence
in
24
the
Iowa
teaching
standards,
identifying
teachers
in
need
of
25
improvement,
or
to
determine
whether
the
teacher’s
practice
26
meets
school
district
expectations
for
career
advancement
in
27
accordance
with
section
284.7
.
The
review
shall
be
conducted
28
by
at
least
one
evaluator
certified
in
accordance
with
section
29
284.10,
and
shall
include,
at
minimum,
classroom
observation
30
of
the
teacher,
the
teacher’s
progress,
and
implementation
of
31
the
teacher’s
individual
professional
development
plan,
subject
32
to
the
level
of
resources
provided
to
implement
the
plan;
and
33
shall
include
supporting
documentation
from
parents,
students,
34
and
other
teachers.
35
-6-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
6/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
2.
If
,
as
a
result
of
a
review
conducted
pursuant
to
1
subsection
1,
a
supervisor
or
an
evaluator
determines
,
at
any
2
time,
as
a
result
of
a
teacher’s
performance
that
the
a
teacher
3
is
not
meeting
district
expectations
under
the
Iowa
teaching
4
standards
specified
in
section
284.3,
subsection
1
,
paragraphs
5
“a”
through
“h”
established
by
the
state
board
by
rule
,
the
6
criteria
for
the
Iowa
teaching
standards
developed
by
the
7
department
in
accordance
with
section
256.9,
subsection
46
,
and
8
any
other
standards
or
criteria
established
in
the
collective
9
bargaining
agreement,
the
evaluator
shall,
at
the
direction
of
10
the
teacher’s
supervisor,
recommend
to
the
district
that
the
11
teacher
participate
in
an
intensive
assistance
program.
The
12
intensive
assistance
program
and
its
implementation
are
subject
13
to
negotiation
and
grievance
procedures
established
pursuant
to
14
chapter
20
.
All
school
districts
shall
be
prepared
to
offer
an
15
intensive
assistance
program.
16
Sec.
14.
Section
284A.7,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
17
follows:
18
284A.7
Evaluation
requirements
for
administrators.
19
1.
A
school
district
shall
conduct
an
annual
evaluation
20
of
an
administrator
who
holds
a
professional
administrator
21
license
issued
under
chapter
272
at
least
once
every
three
22
years
chapter
256
for
purposes
of
assisting
the
administrator
23
in
making
continuous
improvement,
documenting
continued
24
competence
in
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
25
adopted
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
27
,
or
to
26
determine
whether
the
administrator’s
practice
meets
school
27
district
expectations.
The
review
shall
include,
at
a
minimum,
28
an
assessment
of
the
administrator’s
competence
in
meeting
29
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
and
the
goals
of
30
the
administrator’s
individual
professional
development
plan,
31
including
supporting
documentation
or
artifacts
aligned
to
the
32
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
and
the
individual
33
administrator’s
professional
development
plan.
34
2.
Adopt
the
statewide
administrator
evaluation
system
35
-7-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
7/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
developed
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
64.
However,
1
the
school
district
may
develop
and
submit
to
the
department
2
for
approval
an
alternative
administrator
evaluation
system
3
that
meets
local
and
state
educational
goals.
In
lieu
of
4
the
statewide
administrator
evaluation
system,
the
school
5
district
may
adopt
and
implement
the
alternative
administrator
6
evaluation
system
upon
receiving
approval
from
the
department.
7
Sec.
15.
STATEWIDE
EDUCATOR
EVALUATION
SYSTEM
TASK
8
FORCE.
The
director
of
the
department
of
education
shall
9
appoint,
and
provide
staffing
services
for,
a
task
force
to
10
conduct
a
study
regarding
a
statewide
teacher
evaluation
11
system
and
a
statewide
administrator
evaluation
system.
The
12
study
of
a
statewide
teacher
evaluation
system
shall
include
a
13
review
of
student
outcome
measures
described
in
section
256.9,
14
subsection
64,
paragraph
“b”,
subparagraph
(2).
To
the
extent
15
possible,
appointments
shall
be
made
to
provide
geographical
16
area
representation
and
to
comply
with
sections
69.16,
69.16A,
17
and
69.16C.
The
task
force,
at
a
minimum,
shall
include
in
its
18
recommendations
and
proposal
a
tiered
evaluation
system
that
19
differentiates
ineffective,
minimally
effective,
effective,
and
20
highly
effective
performance
by
teachers
and
administrators.
21
The
task
force
shall
submit
its
findings,
recommendations,
and
22
a
proposal
for
each
system
to
the
state
board
of
education
by
23
October
15,
2012.
24
Sec.
16.
TEACHER
PERFORMANCE,
COMPENSATION,
AND
CAREER
25
DEVELOPMENT
TASK
FORCE.
26
1.
The
director
of
the
department
of
education
shall
27
appoint,
and
provide
staffing
services
for,
a
teacher
28
performance,
compensation,
and
career
development
task
force
29
to
develop
recommendations
for
a
new
teacher
compensation
30
system
to
replace
the
current
teacher
compensation
system
which
31
addresses,
at
a
minimum,
the
following:
32
a.
The
duties
and
responsibilities
of
apprentice,
career,
33
mentor,
and
master
teachers.
34
b.
Utilizing
retired
teachers
as
mentors.
35
-8-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
8/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
c.
Strategic
and
meaningful
uses
of
finite
resources
and
the
1
realignment
of
resources
currently
available.
2
d.
Mechanisms
to
substantially
increase
the
average
salary
3
of
teachers
who
assume
leadership
roles
within
the
profession.
4
e.
Standardizing
implementation
of
task
force
5
recommendations
in
all
of
Iowa’s
school
districts
and
public
6
charter
schools.
7
2.
The
director
of
the
department
of
education
shall
appoint
8
and
provide
staffing
services
for
a
task
force
whose
members
9
shall
represent
teachers,
parents,
school
administrators,
10
and
business
and
community
leaders.
Insofar
as
practicable,
11
appointments
shall
be
made
to
provide
geographical
area
12
representation
and
to
comply
with
sections
69.16,
69.16A,
and
13
69.16C.
14
3.
The
state
board
of
education
shall
consider
the
findings
15
and
recommendations
of
the
task
force
when
adopting
rules
16
establishing
Iowa
teaching
standards
pursuant
to
this
Act.
17
4.
The
task
force
shall
submit
its
findings
and
18
recommendations
in
a
report
to
the
state
board
of
education,
19
the
governor,
and
the
general
assembly
by
October
15,
2012.
20
Sec.
17.
REPEAL.
Section
284.14A,
Code
2011,
is
repealed.
21
Sec.
18.
EFFECTIVE
UPON
ENACTMENT.
The
sections
of
22
this
division
of
this
Act
providing
for
the
appointment
of
23
the
statewide
educator
evaluation
system
task
force
and
the
24
appointment
of
the
teacher
performance,
compensation,
and
25
career
development
task
force,
being
deemed
of
immediate
26
importance,
take
effect
upon
enactment.
27
DIVISION
V
28
INNOVATION
ACCELERATION
PROGRAM
——
FUND
29
Sec.
19.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.65
Innovation
acceleration
30
program
——
fund.
31
1.
An
innovation
acceleration
program
is
established
32
in
the
department
to
be
administered
by
the
department
to
33
provide
competitive
grants
to
applicants
with
a
record
of
34
improving
student
achievement
and
educational
attainment
in
35
-9-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
9/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
order
to
expand
the
implementation
of,
and
investment
in,
1
innovative
practices
that
are
demonstrated
to
have
an
impact
2
on
improving
student
achievement
or
student
growth,
closing
3
achievement
gaps,
decreasing
dropout
rates,
increasing
parental
4
involvement,
increasing
attendance
rates,
increasing
high
5
school
graduation
rates,
or
increasing
college
and
career
6
program
enrollment
and
completion
rates.
The
state
board
shall
7
adopt
rules
relating
to
applicant
eligibility,
application
8
procedures,
and
awarding
of
grants.
9
2.
The
program
shall
be
designed
to
enable
grantees
to
10
accomplish
all
of
the
following:
11
a.
Expand
and
develop
innovative
practices
that
can
serve
as
12
models
of
best
practices.
13
b.
Work
in
partnership
with
the
private
sector,
14
community-based
organizations,
and
the
philanthropic
community.
15
c.
Identify
and
document
best
practices
that
can
be
shared
16
and
expanded
based
on
demonstrated
success.
17
3.
An
innovation
acceleration
fund
is
created
in
the
state
18
treasury
under
the
control
of
the
department.
The
fund
shall
19
be
administered
by
the
director
and
shall
consist
of
all
moneys
20
deposited
in
the
fund,
including
any
moneys
appropriated
by
the
21
general
assembly
and
any
other
moneys
available
to
and
obtained
22
or
accepted
by
the
department
from
local,
state,
federal,
or
23
private
sources
for
purposes
of
the
innovation
acceleration
24
program.
Notwithstanding
section
8.33,
moneys
in
the
fund
at
25
the
end
of
a
fiscal
year
shall
not
revert
to
the
general
fund
26
of
the
state.
Notwithstanding
section
12C.7,
subsection
2,
27
interest
or
earnings
on
moneys
in
the
fund
shall
be
credited
28
to
the
fund.
29
DIVISION
VI
30
ONLINE
LEARNING
31
Sec.
20.
Section
256.7,
subsection
8,
Code
Supplement
2011,
32
is
amended
by
striking
the
subsection
and
inserting
in
lieu
33
thereof
the
following:
34
8.
Adopt
rules
providing
for
the
establishment
of
an
online
35
-10-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
10/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
learning
program
model.
For
purposes
of
this
section
and
1
sections
256.9
and
256.27,
“online
learning”
means
educational
2
instruction
and
content
which
is
delivered
primarily
over
the
3
internet.
“Online
learning”
does
not
include
printed-based
4
correspondence
education,
broadcast
television
or
radio,
5
videocassettes,
or
stand-alone
educational
software
programs
6
that
do
not
have
a
significant
internet-based
instructional
7
component.
8
Sec.
21.
Section
256.9,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
9
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
10
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
65.
a.
Develop
and
establish
an
online
11
learning
program
model
in
accordance
with
rules
adopted
12
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
8.
13
b.
Grant
a
waiver
to
school
districts,
charter
schools,
14
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
that
implement
an
online
15
learning
program
aligned
with
the
program
model
developed
and
16
established
pursuant
to
this
subsection.
A
school
district
or
17
school
seeking
a
waiver
pursuant
to
this
paragraph
shall
submit
18
a
plan
for
an
online
learning
program
to
the
director
for
19
approval.
A
school
district
or
school
whose
online
learning
20
program
plan
is
approved
by
the
director
may
be
granted
a
21
waiver
only
for
purposes
of
implementing
the
approved
online
22
learning
program.
The
standards
that
may
be
waived
pursuant
to
23
this
paragraph
are
as
follows:
24
(1)
The
minimum
number
of
instructional
days
required
25
pursuant
to
section
279.10,
subsection
1,
and
the
minimum
26
number
of
instructional
hours
required
pursuant
to
section
27
256.7,
subsection
19.
Notwithstanding
any
provision
to
the
28
contrary,
the
waiver
may
exempt
school
districts
and
schools
29
from
any
statutory
requirement
that
students
be
physically
30
present
in
a
school
building
and
under
the
guidance
and
31
instruction
of
the
instructional
professional
staff
employed
by
32
the
school
district
or
the
school
except
as
necessary
under
the
33
rules
adopted
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
8.
34
(2)
Any
statutory
requirement
that
a
subject
being
studied
35
-11-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
11/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
by
a
student
enrolled
in
an
approved
online
learning
program
be
1
a
subject
that
is
offered
and
taught
by
the
professional
staff
2
of
the
school
district
or
school.
3
c.
Require
that
the
school
district
or
school
granted
a
4
waiver
pursuant
to
paragraph
“b”
implement
and
incorporate
5
into
its
comprehensive
school
improvement
plan
required
under
6
section
256.7,
subsection
21,
accountability
measures
designed
7
to
demonstrate
that
academic
credit
is
awarded
based
upon
8
successful
completion
of
content
or
achievement
of
competencies
9
by
students
enrolled
in
the
approved
online
learning
program.
10
d.
Establish
criteria
for
school
districts
or
schools
to
11
use
when
choosing
providers
of
online
learning
to
meet
the
12
online
learning
program
requirements
specified
in
rules
adopted
13
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
8.
14
Sec.
22.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.27
Online
learning
program
model.
15
1.
Online
learning
program
model
established.
The
director,
16
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
65,
shall
establish
an
17
online
learning
program
model
that
provides
for
the
following:
18
a.
Online
access
to
high-quality
content,
instructional
19
materials,
and
blended
learning.
20
b.
Coursework
customized
to
the
needs
of
the
student
using
21
online
content.
22
c.
A
means
for
a
student
to
demonstrate
competency
in
23
completed
online
coursework.
24
d.
High-quality
online
instruction
taught
by
appropriately
25
licensed
teachers.
26
e.
Online
content
and
instruction
evaluated
on
the
basis
of
27
student
learning
outcomes.
28
f.
Use
of
funds
available
for
online
learning
for
program
29
development,
implementation,
and
innovation.
30
g.
Infrastructure
that
supports
online
learning.
31
h.
Online
administration
of
online
course
assessments.
32
2.
Online
learning
program
waiver
application.
A
school
33
district,
charter
school,
or
accredited
nonpublic
school
may
34
apply
to
the
department
for
a
waiver
to
implement
an
online
35
-12-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
12/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
learning
program
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
65.
1
3.
Private
providers.
At
the
discretion
of
the
school
board
2
or
authorities
in
charge
of
an
accredited
nonpublic
school,
3
after
consideration
of
circumstances
created
by
necessity,
4
convenience,
and
cost-effectiveness,
courses
developed
by
5
private
providers
may
be
utilized
by
the
school
district
or
6
school
in
implementing
a
high-quality
online
learning
program.
7
Courses
obtained
from
private
providers
shall
be
taught
by
8
teachers
licensed
under
this
chapter.
9
4.
Grading.
Grades
in
online
courses
shall
be
based,
10
at
a
minimum,
on
whether
a
student
mastered
the
subject,
11
demonstrated
competency,
and
met
the
standards
established
12
by
the
school
district.
Grades
shall
be
conferred
by
13
appropriately
licensed
teachers
only.
14
5.
Accreditation
criteria.
All
online
courses
and
programs
15
shall
meet
existing
accreditation
standards.
16
Sec.
23.
Section
256.33,
subsection
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
17
to
read
as
follows:
18
1.
The
department
shall
consort
with
school
districts,
19
area
education
agencies,
community
colleges,
and
colleges
20
and
universities
to
provide
assistance
to
them
in
the
use
21
of
educational
technology
for
instruction
purposes.
The
22
department
shall
consult
with
the
advisory
committee
on
23
telecommunications,
established
in
section
256.7,
subsection
7
,
24
and
other
users
of
educational
technology
on
the
development
25
and
operation
of
programs
under
this
section
,
section
256.9,
26
subsection
65,
and
section
256.27
.
27
DIVISION
VII
28
EDUCATIONAL
STANDARDS
EXEMPTIONS
29
Sec.
24.
Section
256.11,
subsection
8,
Code
2011,
is
amended
30
to
read
as
follows:
31
8.
a.
Upon
request
of
the
board
of
directors
of
a
public
32
school
district
or
the
authorities
in
charge
of
a
nonpublic
33
school,
the
director
may,
for
a
number
of
years
to
be
specified
34
by
the
director,
grant
the
district
board
or
the
authorities
35
-13-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
13/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
in
charge
of
the
nonpublic
school
exemption
from
one
or
more
1
of
the
requirements
of
the
educational
program
specified
in
2
subsection
5
.
The
exemption
may
be
renewed.
Exemptions
3
shall
be
granted
only
if
the
director
deems
that
the
request
4
made
is
an
essential
part
of
a
planned
innovative
curriculum
5
project
which
the
director
determines
will
adequately
meet
6
the
educational
needs
and
interests
of
the
pupils
and
be
7
broadly
consistent
with
the
intent
of
the
educational
program
8
as
defined
in
subsection
5
.
The
request
for
exemption
shall
9
include
all
of
the
following:
10
a.
(1)
Rationale
of
the
project
to
include
supportive
11
research
evidence.
12
b.
(2)
Objectives
of
the
project.
13
c.
(3)
Provisions
for
administration
and
conduct
of
the
14
project,
including
the
use
of
personnel,
facilities,
time,
15
techniques,
and
activities.
16
d.
(4)
Plans
for
evaluation
of
the
project
by
testing
17
and
observational
measures
of
pupil
progress
in
reaching
the
18
objectives.
19
e.
(5)
Plans
for
revisions
of
the
project
based
on
20
evaluation
measures.
21
f.
(6)
Plans
for
periodic
reports
to
the
department.
22
g.
(7)
The
estimated
cost
of
the
project.
23
b.
Upon
request
of
the
board
of
directors
of
a
public
24
school
district,
the
director
may,
for
a
number
of
years
to
be
25
specified
by
the
director,
grant
the
district
board
exemption
26
from
one
or
more
of
the
requirements
of
the
educational
program
27
specified
in
this
section
if
the
school
district
complies
with
28
the
requirements
set
forth
in
section
256F.4,
subsection
2,
29
paragraphs
“a”
through
“m”
,
the
request
for
exemption
includes
30
the
components
specified
in
paragraph
“a”
,
subparagraphs
(1)
31
through
(7),
and
the
director
deems
that
the
request
made
is
an
32
essential
part
of
a
planned
innovative
curriculum
project
which
33
the
director
determines
will
adequately
meet
the
educational
34
needs
and
interests
of
the
pupils
and
be
broadly
consistent
35
-14-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
14/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
with
the
intent
of
the
educational
program
as
defined
in
this
1
section.
2
c.
The
director
shall
submit
a
report
by
February
1,
3
annually,
to
the
state
board,
the
governor,
and
the
general
4
assembly
that
lists
all
of
the
exemptions
granted
pursuant
to
5
this
subsection
and
the
reasons
for
which
each
exemption
was
6
granted
by
the
director.
7
DIVISION
VIII
8
EDUCATOR
IDENTIFIER
SYSTEM
AND
EDUCATION
9
PLACEMENT
CLEARINGHOUSE
10
Sec.
25.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.28
Educator
identifier
system
and
11
education
placement
clearinghouse.
12
1.
For
purposes
of
this
section,
unless
the
context
13
otherwise
requires:
14
a.
“Educator”
means
a
teacher
or
principal.
15
b.
“Principal”
means
the
same
as
defined
in
section
256.100,
16
subsection
10.
17
c.
“Teacher”
means
the
same
as
defined
in
section
256.100,
18
subsection
17.
19
2.
Subject
to
an
appropriation
of
sufficient
funds
by
the
20
general
assembly,
there
is
established
within
the
department
21
an
educator
identifier
system
and
an
education
placement
22
clearinghouse
for
use
by
all
educators
and
potential
educators
23
and
by
Iowa’s
school
districts,
area
education
agencies,
24
charter
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools.
25
3.
The
educator
identifier
system
shall
be
designed
for
the
26
purposes
of
providing
information
for
the
following
uses:
27
a.
Studying
teacher
shortage
areas
and
identifying
any
28
possible
solutions.
29
b.
Studying
practitioner
preparation
programs,
educator
30
professional
development
programs,
and
educator
mobility
and
31
retention
issues.
32
c.
Improving
teaching
and
student
learning,
including
the
33
use
of
data
to
recognize,
reward,
and
develop
the
careers
of
34
individual
educators.
35
-15-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
15/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
d.
Collecting
data
for
use
in
developing
a
longitudinal
data
1
system
that
may
be
used
with
the
educator
identifier
system
to
2
match
educators
to
students.
3
e.
Allowing
the
state
to
gather
baseline
data
about
the
4
distribution
of
highly
qualified
teachers,
including
the
number
5
and
percent
of
teachers
employed
in
schools
in
the
state
with
6
the
highest-poverty
and
lowest-poverty
levels,
and
to
take
7
actions
to
address
any
inequities
in
the
distribution
of
highly
8
qualified
teachers
throughout
the
state.
9
f.
Enabling
teachers
to
enhance
student
instruction
through
10
the
use
of
performance
and
longitudinal
growth
data.
11
4.
A
person
who
applies
for
or
holds
a
license
issued
under
12
chapter
256
shall
be
assigned
a
unique
identifier
under
the
13
educator
identifier
system.
14
5.
The
unique
identifier
shall
not
use
any
personal
15
identifying
information,
such
as
social
security
numbers
or
16
contact
information,
except
for
alignment
purposes
in
data
17
processing.
Any
such
personal
identifying
information
that
18
is
collected
for
alignment
purposes
shall
be
maintained
in
a
19
secure
data
location
so
data
sets
can
be
matched
based
on
the
20
personal
identifying
information
when
the
identifier
is
not
21
included.
22
6.
The
educator
identifier
system
shall
include,
at
a
23
minimum,
all
of
the
following
protections
for
educators,
school
24
districts,
area
education
agencies,
charter
schools,
and
25
practitioner
preparation
programs:
26
a.
The
use
of
information
that
a
school
district,
area
27
education
agency,
or
charter
school
obtains
from
any
other
28
source
shall
not
be
restricted
by
the
provisions
of
this
29
subsection.
30
b.
This
subsection
does
not
restrict
the
authority
of
a
31
school
district,
area
education
agency,
or
charter
school
to
32
do
any
of
the
following:
33
(1)
Assign
individual
educators
to
specific
grades,
levels,
34
programs,
or
schools.
35
-16-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
16/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
(2)
Direct
the
professional
development
of
individual
1
educators.
2
(3)
Collaboratively
design
and
develop,
with
representation
3
from
the
teachers
and
principals
employed
by
the
school
4
district,
area
education
agency,
and
charter
school,
5
alternative
compensation
plans
through
the
procedures
adopted
6
by
the
school
district,
area
education
agency,
or
charter
7
school
for
setting
educator
compensation.
8
c.
The
director,
after
consultation
with
practitioner
9
preparation
programs,
shall
establish
protocols
for
the
release
10
of
system
data
relating
to
graduates
to
their
respective
11
practitioner
preparation
programs
for
the
purpose
of
program
12
evaluation.
Protocols
shall
comply
with
all
federal
laws.
13
d.
The
department
may
use
system
data
to
preliminarily
14
identify
practices
that
show
promise
of
improving
student
15
outcomes
or
educator
performance,
if
the
practices
are
verified
16
by
additional
evidence.
17
e.
The
system
shall
comply
with
all
state
and
federal
18
privacy
laws
in
order
to
ensure
the
confidentiality
and
19
appropriate
uses
of
information
included
in
the
system.
20
Aggregate,
nonidentifying
information
obtained
from
the
21
system
shall
be
made
available
at
multiple
levels,
including
22
state,
school
district,
area
education
agency,
charter
school,
23
practitioner
preparation
program,
nongovernmental
entity,
24
and
individual
levels,
through
varying
degrees
of
access,
as
25
designated
by
the
director.
26
7.
Notwithstanding
any
provisions
of
this
section
to
the
27
contrary,
a
school
district,
charter
school,
or
area
education
28
agency
may
use
the
system
to
merge,
manage,
or
access
any
29
information
that
it
is
otherwise
authorized
to
obtain
and
30
the
use
of
such
information
shall
not
be
restricted
in
any
31
way
that
is
otherwise
permitted
by
federal
or
state
statute.
32
Information
obtained
through
the
system
that
school
districts,
33
charter
schools,
or
area
education
agencies
are
not
otherwise
34
authorized
to
obtain
may
be
used
to
achieve
the
purposes
35
-17-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
17/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
described
in
subsection
3,
so
long
as
it
is
not
used
in
any
way
1
inconsistent
with
the
protections
set
out
in
subsection
6.
2
8.
The
education
placement
clearinghouse
shall
be
designed
3
and
implemented
for
the
posting
of
all
education
job
openings
4
offered
by
the
school
districts,
area
education
agencies,
5
charter
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
in
the
state.
6
a.
School
districts,
area
education
agencies,
charter
7
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
shall
submit
their
8
education
job
openings
to
the
department
for
posting
on
the
9
department’s
internet
site.
10
b.
An
applicant
shall
apply
once
to
the
department,
upon
11
forms
furnished
or
made
available
in
electronic
form
and
12
prescribed
by
the
director,
and
shall
indicate
the
applicant’s
13
job
interests,
including
but
not
limited
to
regions
of
14
interest,
levels
or
areas
of
endorsement
and
licensure,
and
15
interests
in
current
job
postings
on
the
department’s
internet
16
site.
Only
applicants
who
apply
and
meet
requirements
of
this
17
paragraph
are
eligible
to
be
interviewed
for
a
job
opening
18
posted
pursuant
to
paragraph
“a”
.
The
director
shall
provide
19
applicants
with
an
option
to
update
the
information
submitted
20
in
accordance
with
this
paragraph.
21
c.
The
director
shall
develop
and
implement
a
screening
22
process
to
identify
high-quality
educators
that
uses
but
is
23
not
limited
to
the
data
collected
from
the
educator
identifier
24
system.
25
d.
A
school
district,
area
education
agency,
charter
school,
26
or
accredited
nonpublic
school
that
interviews
an
applicant
27
pursuant
to
paragraph
“b”
may
request
information
from
the
28
applicant
that
was
not
collected
and
is
not
maintained
by
the
29
clearinghouse,
but
shall
not
ask
an
applicant
for
information
30
that
duplicates
information
collected
from
the
applicant
and
31
maintained
by
the
clearinghouse.
32
e.
This
subsection
shall
not
be
construed
to
discourage
33
a
school
district,
area
education
agency,
charter
school,
or
34
accredited
nonpublic
school
from
advertising,
or
from
otherwise
35
-18-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
18/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
making
known,
the
positions
available
through
the
education
1
placement
clearinghouse.
2
DIVISION
IX
3
CLASS
SHARING
AGREEMENTS
4
Sec.
26.
Section
257.11,
subsection
3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
5
by
adding
the
following
new
paragraph:
6
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
c.
A
school
district
that
collaborates
with
7
a
community
college
to
provide
a
college-level
class
that
uses
8
an
activities-based,
project-based,
and
problem-based
learning
9
approach
and
that
is
offered
through
a
partnership
with
a
10
nationally
recognized
provider
of
rigorous
and
innovative
11
science,
technology,
engineering,
and
mathematics
curriculum
12
for
schools,
which
provider
is
exempt
from
taxation
under
13
section
501(c)(3)
of
the
Internal
Revenue
Code,
is
eligible
to
14
receive
additional
weighting
under
a
supplementary
weighting
15
plan
adopted
pursuant
to
this
subsection.
16
DIVISION
X
17
STATE
BOARD
OF
EDUCATION
LICENSURE
PROVISIONS
18
Sec.
27.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.100
Definitions.
19
As
used
in
this
subchapter,
unless
the
context
otherwise
20
requires:
21
1.
“Administrator”
means
a
person
who
is
licensed
to
22
coordinate,
supervise,
or
direct
an
educational
program
or
the
23
activities
of
other
practitioners.
24
2.
“Board”
means
the
board
of
educational
examiners.
25
3.
“Certificate”
means
limited
recognition
to
perform
26
instruction
and
instruction-related
duties
in
school,
other
27
than
those
duties
for
which
practitioners
are
licensed.
A
28
certificate
is
nonexclusive
recognition
and
does
not
confer
the
29
exclusive
authority
of
a
license.
30
4.
“License”
means
the
authority
that
is
given
to
allow
31
a
person
to
legally
serve
as
a
practitioner,
a
school,
an
32
institution,
or
a
course
of
study
to
legally
offer
professional
33
development
programs,
other
than
those
programs
offered
by
34
practitioner
preparation
schools,
institutions,
courses
of
35
-19-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
19/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
study,
or
area
education
agencies.
A
license
is
the
exclusive
1
authority
to
perform
these
functions.
2
5.
“Paraeducator”
means
a
person
who
is
certified
to
assist
3
a
teacher
in
the
performance
of
instructional
tasks
to
support
4
and
assist
classroom
instruction
and
related
school
activities.
5
6.
“Practitioner”
means
an
administrator,
teacher,
or
other
6
licensed
professional,
including
an
individual
who
holds
a
7
statement
of
professional
recognition,
who
provides
educational
8
assistance
to
students.
9
7.
“Practitioner
preparation
program”
means
a
program
10
approved
by
the
state
board
which
prepares
a
person
to
obtain
a
11
license
as
a
practitioner.
12
8.
“Principal”
means
a
licensed
member
of
a
school’s
13
instructional
staff
who
serves
as
an
instructional
leader,
14
coordinates
the
process
and
substance
of
educational
and
15
instructional
programs,
coordinates
the
budget
of
the
school,
16
provides
formative
evaluation
for
all
practitioners
and
other
17
persons
in
the
school,
recommends
or
has
effective
authority
18
to
appoint,
assign,
promote,
or
transfer
personnel
in
a
school
19
building,
implements
the
local
school
board’s
policy
in
a
20
manner
consistent
with
professional
practice
and
ethics,
and
21
assists
in
the
development
and
supervision
of
a
school’s
22
student
activities
program.
23
9.
“Professional
development
program”
means
a
course
or
24
program
which
is
offered
by
a
person
or
agency
for
the
purpose
25
of
providing
continuing
education
for
the
renewal
or
upgrading
26
of
a
practitioner’s
license.
27
10.
“School”
means
a
school
under
section
280.2,
an
area
28
education
agency,
and
a
school
operated
by
a
state
agency
for
29
special
purposes.
30
11.
“School
administration
manager”
means
a
person
who
31
is
authorized
to
assist
a
school
principal
in
performing
32
noninstructional
administrative
duties.
33
12.
“School
service
personnel”
means
those
persons
holding
34
a
practitioner’s
license
who
provide
support
services
for
a
35
-20-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
20/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
student
enrolled
in
school
or
to
practitioners
employed
in
a
1
school.
2
13.
“State
board”
means
the
state
board
of
education.
3
14.
“Student”
means
a
person
who
is
enrolled
in
a
course
of
4
study
at
a
school
or
practitioner
preparation
program,
or
who
5
is
receiving
direct
or
indirect
assistance
from
a
practitioner.
6
15.
“Superintendent”
means
an
administrator
who
promotes,
7
demotes,
transfers,
assigns,
or
evaluates
practitioners
or
8
other
personnel,
and
carries
out
the
policies
of
a
governing
9
board
in
a
manner
consistent
with
professional
practice
and
10
ethics.
11
16.
“Teacher”
means
a
licensed
member
of
a
school’s
12
instructional
staff
who
diagnoses,
prescribes,
evaluates,
13
and
directs
student
learning
in
a
manner
which
is
consistent
14
with
professional
practice
and
school
objectives,
shares
15
responsibility
for
the
development
of
an
instructional
program
16
and
any
coordinating
activities,
evaluates
or
assesses
student
17
progress
before
and
after
instruction,
and
who
uses
the
student
18
evaluation
or
assessment
information
to
promote
additional
19
student
learning.
20
Sec.
28.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.101
Duties
of
the
state
board.
21
The
state
board
shall
do
the
following:
22
1.
Adopt
rules
pursuant
to
chapter
17A
to
implement
this
23
subchapter.
24
2.
a.
Provide
for
the
licensure
of
practitioners
and
the
25
issuance
of
certificates,
authorizations,
and
statements
of
26
professional
recognition
to
other
education-related
personnel;
27
establish
criteria
for
licenses,
certificates,
authorizations,
28
and
statements
of
professional
recognition;
establish
29
application,
issuance,
revocation,
suspension,
and
renewal
30
requirements
and
procedures;
create
licenses
that
authorize
31
different
instructional
functions
or
specialties;
and
develop
32
any
other
classifications,
distinctions,
and
procedures
which
33
may
be
necessary
to
exercise
licensing
duties.
34
b.
Provide
for,
in
accordance
with
paragraph
“a”
,
the
35
-21-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
21/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
issuance
of
statements
of
professional
recognition
to
1
school
service
personnel
who
have
attained
a
minimum
of
2
a
baccalaureate
degree
and
who
are
licensed
by
another
3
professional
licensing
board,
including
but
not
limited
to
4
athletic
trainers
licensed
under
chapter
152D.
5
c.
Provide
for,
in
accordance
with
paragraph
“a”
,
the
6
issuance
of
authorizations
for
practitioners
who
are
not
7
eligible
for
a
statement
of
professional
recognition
under
8
paragraph
“b”
,
but
have
received
a
baccalaureate
degree
and
9
provide
a
service
to
students
at
any
level
from
prekindergarten
10
through
grade
twelve
for
a
school
district,
accredited
11
nonpublic
school,
area
education
agency,
or
preschool
program
12
established
pursuant
to
chapter
256C.
13
3.
Develop
and
adopt
a
code
of
professional
rights
and
14
responsibilities,
practices,
and
ethics,
which
shall,
among
15
other
things,
address
the
failure
of
a
practitioner
to
16
fulfill
contractual
obligations
under
section
279.13.
In
17
addressing
the
failure
of
a
practitioner
to
fulfill
contractual
18
obligations,
the
rules
shall
allow
consideration
of
factors
19
beyond
the
practitioner’s
control.
20
4.
Provide
annually
to
any
person
who
holds
a
license,
21
certificate,
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
22
recognition
issued
by
the
department,
training
relating
to
23
the
knowledge
and
understanding
of
the
state
board’s
code
24
of
professional
conduct
and
ethics.
The
department
shall
25
develop
a
curriculum
that
addresses
the
code
of
professional
26
conduct
and
ethics
and
shall
annually
provide
regional
training
27
opportunities
throughout
the
state.
28
5.
Establish
fees
for
a
license,
certificate,
29
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
issued
30
pursuant
to
this
subchapter.
31
6.
Enter
into
reciprocity
agreements
with
other
equivalent
32
state
boards
or
a
national
certification
board
to
provide
for
33
licensing
of
applicants
from
other
states
or
nations.
34
7.
Establish
and
adopt
standards
for
the
determination
35
-22-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
22/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
whether
an
applicant
is
qualified
to
perform
the
duties
1
required
for
a
given
license.
2
8.
Provide
alternative
pathways
to
the
initial
teacher
3
license
and
initial
administrator
license
or
endorsement
in
4
accordance
with
section
256.124.
The
rules
shall
prescribe
5
standards
and
procedures
for
the
approval
of
alternative
6
principal
licensing
programs
which
may
be
offered
in
this
state
7
by
designated
agencies
located
within
or
outside
this
state.
8
Procedures
provided
for
approval
of
alternative
principal
9
licensing
programs
shall
include
procedures
for
enforcement
of
10
the
prescribed
standards.
11
9.
Adopt
rules
to
determine
whether
an
applicant
is
12
qualified
to
perform
the
duties
for
which
a
license,
13
certificate,
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
14
recognition
is
sought.
The
rules
shall
include
all
of
the
15
following:
16
a.
Provision
for
the
denial
of
a
license,
certificate,
17
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
of
a
18
person
upon
the
department’s
finding,
and
for
the
revocation
19
of
a
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
statement
of
20
professional
recognition
upon
the
board’s
finding,
by
a
21
preponderance
of
evidence
that
either
the
person
has
been
22
convicted
of
a
crime
or
that
there
has
been
a
founded
report
of
23
child
abuse
against
the
person.
Rules
adopted
in
accordance
24
with
this
paragraph
shall
provide
that
in
determining
whether
25
a
person
should
be
denied
a
license
or
that
a
practitioner’s
26
license
should
be
revoked,
the
department
or
board,
as
27
appropriate,
shall
consider
the
nature
and
seriousness
of
the
28
founded
abuse
or
crime
in
relation
to
the
position
sought
or
29
held,
the
time
elapsed
since
the
crime
was
committed,
the
30
degree
of
rehabilitation
which
has
taken
place
since
the
31
incidence
of
founded
abuse
or
the
commission
of
the
crime,
32
the
likelihood
that
the
person
will
commit
the
same
abuse
or
33
crime
again,
and
the
number
of
founded
abuses
committed
by
or
34
criminal
convictions
of
the
person
involved.
35
-23-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
23/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
b.
Notwithstanding
paragraph
“a”
,
a
requirement
that
the
1
department
disqualify
an
applicant
for
a
license,
certificate,
2
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
or
that
3
the
board
revoke
the
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
4
statement
of
professional
recognition
of
a
person
for
any
of
5
the
following
reasons:
6
(1)
The
person
entered
a
plea
of
guilty
to,
or
has
been
7
found
guilty
of,
any
of
the
following
offenses,
whether
or
not
8
a
sentence
is
imposed:
9
(a)
Any
of
the
following
forcible
felonies
included
in
10
section
702.11:
child
endangerment,
assault,
murder,
sexual
11
abuse,
or
kidnapping.
12
(b)
Any
of
the
following
sexual
abuse
offenses,
as
provided
13
in
chapter
709,
involving
a
child:
14
(i)
First,
second,
or
third
degree
sexual
abuse
committed
on
15
or
with
a
person
who
is
under
the
age
of
eighteen
years.
16
(ii)
Lascivious
acts
with
a
child.
17
(iii)
Assault
with
intent
to
commit
sexual
abuse.
18
(iv)
Indecent
contact
with
a
child.
19
(v)
Sexual
exploitation
by
a
counselor.
20
(vi)
Lascivious
conduct
with
a
minor.
21
(vii)
Sexual
exploitation
by
a
school
employee.
22
(c)
Enticing
a
minor
under
section
710.10.
23
(d)
Human
trafficking
under
section
710A.2.
24
(e)
Incest
involving
a
child
under
section
726.2.
25
(f)
Dissemination
and
exhibition
of
obscene
material
to
26
minors
under
section
728.2.
27
(g)
Telephone
dissemination
of
obscene
material
to
minors
28
under
section
728.15.
29
(h)
Any
offense
specified
in
the
laws
of
another
30
jurisdiction,
or
any
offense
that
may
be
prosecuted
in
federal,
31
military,
or
foreign
court,
that
is
comparable
to
an
offense
32
listed
in
this
subparagraph
(1).
33
(i)
Any
offense
under
prior
laws
of
this
state
or
another
34
jurisdiction,
or
any
offense
under
prior
law
that
was
35
-24-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
24/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
prosecuted
in
a
federal,
military,
or
foreign
court,
that
is
1
comparable
to
an
offense
listed
in
this
subparagraph
(1).
2
(2)
The
applicant
is
less
than
twenty-one
years
of
age
3
except
as
provided
in
section
256.117,
subsection
1,
paragraph
4
“e”
.
However,
a
student
enrolled
in
a
practitioner
preparation
5
program
who
meets
state
board
requirements
for
a
temporary,
6
limited-purpose
license
who
is
seeking
to
teach
as
part
of
a
7
practicum
or
internship
may
be
less
than
twenty-one
years
of
8
age.
9
(3)
The
applicant’s
application
is
fraudulent.
10
(4)
The
applicant’s
license
or
certification
from
another
11
state
is
suspended
or
revoked.
12
(5)
The
applicant
fails
to
meet
state
board
standards
for
13
application
for
an
initial
or
renewed
license.
14
c.
Qualifications
or
criteria
for
the
granting
or
15
revocation
of
a
license
or
the
determination
of
an
individual’s
16
professional
standing
shall
not
include
membership
or
17
nonmembership
in
any
teachers’
organization.
18
d.
An
applicant
for
a
license
or
certificate
under
this
19
subchapter
shall
demonstrate
that
the
requirements
of
the
20
license
or
certificate
have
been
met
and
the
burden
of
proof
21
shall
be
on
the
applicant.
22
10.
Adopt
criteria
for
administrative
endorsements
that
23
allow
a
person
to
achieve
the
endorsement
authorizing
the
24
person
to
serve
as
an
elementary
or
secondary
principal
without
25
regard
to
the
grade
level
at
which
the
person
accrued
teaching
26
experience.
27
11.
Adopt
rules
to
require
that
a
background
investigation
28
be
conducted
by
the
division
of
criminal
investigation
of
the
29
department
of
public
safety
on
all
initial
applicants
for
30
licensure.
31
Sec.
29.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.102
Duties
of
the
department.
32
The
department
shall
do
the
following:
33
1.
Carry
out
programs
and
policies
as
determined
by
the
34
state
board,
and
the
duties
and
responsibilities
of
the
35
-25-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
25/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
department
as
set
forth
in
this
subchapter.
1
2.
License
practitioners
and
issue
certificates,
2
authorizations,
and
statements
of
professional
recognition
in
3
accordance
with
rules
adopted
pursuant
to
section
256.101.
4
3.
Enforce
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
under
section
5
256.101
and
the
actions
taken
by
the
board
under
section
6
256.105
or
256.106,
including
but
not
limited
to
enforcement
7
of
disciplinary
action
against
a
practitioner,
practitioner
8
preparation
program,
or
professional
development
program
9
licensed
or
approved
by
the
department.
10
4.
Create
license,
certificate,
authorization,
and
11
statement
of
professional
recognition
application
and
renewal
12
forms.
13
5.
Collect
and
refund
fees
for
a
license,
certificate,
14
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
issued
15
pursuant
to
this
subchapter.
16
6.
Make
recommendations
to
the
state
board
concerning
17
standards
for
the
approval
of
professional
development
18
programs.
19
7.
Apply
for
and
receive
federal
or
other
funds
on
behalf
of
20
the
state
for
purposes
related
to
its
duties.
21
8.
Require
all
initial
applicants
to
submit
a
completed
22
fingerprint
packet
which
the
department
shall
use
to
facilitate
23
a
national
criminal
history
background
check.
The
department
24
shall
have
access
to,
and
shall
review,
the
sex
offender
25
registry
information
under
section
692A.121
available
to
26
the
general
public,
the
central
registry
for
child
abuse
27
information
established
under
chapter
235A,
and
the
dependent
28
adult
abuse
records
maintained
under
chapter
235B
for
29
information
regarding
applicants
for
license
renewal.
30
9.
Evaluate
and
conduct
studies
of
state
board
standards.
31
10.
Periodically
review
the
administrative
rules
adopted
32
pursuant
to
this
subchapter
and
related
state
laws.
The
33
department
shall
compile
and
submit
the
department’s
findings
34
and
recommendations
in
a
written
report
to
the
state
board,
the
35
-26-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
26/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
board,
and
the
general
assembly
by
January
15,
2014,
and
every
1
three
years
thereafter.
2
Sec.
30.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.103
Fees
——
expenditures
and
3
refunds.
4
1.
It
is
the
intent
of
the
general
assembly
that
licensing
5
fees
established
by
the
state
board
be
sufficient
to
finance
6
the
activities
of
the
state
board,
the
board,
and
the
7
department
under
this
subchapter.
8
2.
Licensing
fees
are
payable
to
the
treasurer
of
state
and
9
shall
be
deposited
with
the
department.
The
licensing
fees
10
collected
during
the
fiscal
year
shall
be
retained
by
and
are
11
appropriated
to
the
department
for
the
purposes
related
to
the
12
administration
of
this
subchapter.
Notwithstanding
section
13
8.33,
licensing
fees
retained
by
and
appropriated
to
the
14
department
pursuant
to
this
section
that
remain
unencumbered
or
15
unobligated
at
the
close
of
the
fiscal
year
shall
not
revert
16
but
shall
remain
available
for
expenditure
for
purposes
of
17
the
administration
of
this
subchapter
until
the
close
of
the
18
succeeding
fiscal
year.
19
3.
The
director
shall
keep
an
accurate
and
detailed
account
20
of
the
fees
received.
21
4.
The
department
shall
submit
a
detailed
annual
financial
22
report
by
January
1
to
the
general
assembly
and
the
legislative
23
services
agency.
24
5.
Expenditures
and
refunds
made
for
purposes
of
this
25
subchapter
shall
be
certified
by
the
director
to
the
director
26
of
the
department
of
administrative
services
and,
if
found
27
correct,
the
director
of
the
department
of
administrative
28
services
shall
approve
the
expenditures
and
refunds
and
29
draw
warrants
upon
the
treasurer
of
state
from
the
funds
30
appropriated
for
that
purpose.
31
Sec.
31.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.104
Board
of
educational
32
examiners
created.
33
1.
The
board
of
educational
examiners
is
established
to
34
enforce
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
through
revocation
35
-27-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
27/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
or
suspension
of
a
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
1
statement
of
professional
recognition
or
by
other
disciplinary
2
action
against
a
person
who
holds
a
license,
certificate,
3
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
or
4
professional
development
program
approved
by
the
state
board
5
and
to
hear
appeals
regarding
application,
renewal,
suspension,
6
or
revocation
of
a
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
7
statement
of
professional
recognition
issued
pursuant
to
this
8
subchapter.
9
2.
The
board
consists
of
twelve
members
who
shall
be
10
appointed
by
the
governor
subject
to
confirmation
by
the
11
senate.
12
3.
The
members
shall
include
the
following:
13
a.
Two
members
of
the
general
public.
One
of
the
public
14
members
shall
have
served
on
a
school
board.
The
public
15
members
shall
never
have
held
a
practitioner’s
license,
but
16
shall
have
a
demonstrated
interest
in
education.
17
b.
The
director
appointed
pursuant
to
section
256.8,
or
the
18
director’s
designee.
19
c.
(1)
Nine
members
who
are
licensed
practitioners,
who
20
shall
be
selected
from
the
following
areas
and
specialties
of
21
the
teaching
profession:
22
(a)
Elementary
teachers.
23
(b)
Secondary
teachers.
24
(c)
Special
education
or
other
similar
teachers.
25
(d)
Counselors
or
other
special
purpose
practitioners.
26
(e)
Administrators.
27
(f)
School
service
personnel.
28
(2)
A
majority
of
the
licensed
practitioner
members
shall
29
be
nonadministrative
practitioners.
Four
of
the
licensed
30
practitioner
members
shall
be
administrators.
31
4.
Membership
of
the
board
shall
comply
with
the
32
requirements
of
sections
69.16
and
69.16A.
A
quorum
of
the
33
board
shall
consist
of
six
members.
Members
shall
elect
a
34
chairperson
of
the
board.
35
-28-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
28/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
5.
a.
Members
except
for
the
director
or
the
director’s
1
designee
shall
be
appointed
to
serve
staggered
terms
of
four
2
years.
A
member
shall
not
serve
more
than
two
consecutive
3
terms,
except
for
the
director
or
the
director’s
designee,
who
4
shall
serve
until
the
director’s
term
of
office
expires.
A
5
vacancy
exists
when
any
of
the
following
occur:
6
(1)
A
nonpublic
member’s
license
expires,
is
suspended,
or
7
is
revoked.
8
(2)
A
nonpublic
member
retires
or
terminates
employment
as
a
9
practitioner.
10
(3)
A
member
dies,
resigns,
is
removed
from
office,
or
is
11
otherwise
physically
unable
to
perform
the
duties
of
office.
12
(4)
A
member’s
term
of
office
expires.
13
b.
Terms
of
office
for
regular
appointments
shall
begin
14
and
end
as
provided
in
section
69.19.
Terms
of
office
for
15
members
appointed
to
fill
vacancies
shall
begin
on
the
date
16
of
appointment
and
end
as
provided
in
section
69.19.
Members
17
may
be
removed
for
cause
by
a
state
court
with
competent
18
jurisdiction
after
notice
and
opportunity
for
hearing.
The
19
board
may
remove
a
member
for
three
consecutive
absences
or
for
20
cause.
21
6.
Members
shall
be
reimbursed
for
actual
and
necessary
22
expenses
incurred
while
engaged
in
their
official
duties
23
and
may
be
entitled
to
per
diem
compensation
as
authorized
24
under
section
7E.6.
For
duties
performed
during
an
ordinary
25
school
day
by
a
member
who
is
employed
by
a
school
corporation
26
or
state
university,
the
member
shall
also
receive
regular
27
compensation
from
the
school
or
university.
However,
the
28
member
shall
reimburse
the
school
or
university
in
the
amount
29
of
the
per
diem
compensation
received.
30
Sec.
32.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.105
Board
hearing
procedures
——
31
confidentiality
——
administrative
law
judges.
32
1.
The
board
shall
designate
who
may
or
shall
initiate
a
33
licensee
disciplinary
investigation
and
a
licensee
disciplinary
34
proceeding,
and
who
shall
prosecute
a
disciplinary
proceeding
35
-29-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
29/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
and
under
what
conditions,
and
shall
state
the
procedures
for
1
review
by
the
board
of
findings
of
fact
if
a
majority
of
the
2
board
does
not
hear
the
disciplinary
proceeding.
However,
in
a
3
case
alleging
failure
of
a
practitioner
to
fulfill
contractual
4
obligations,
the
person
who
files
a
complaint
with
the
board,
5
or
the
complainant’s
designee,
shall
represent
the
complainant
6
in
a
disciplinary
hearing
conducted
in
accordance
with
this
7
subchapter.
8
2.
Hearings
before
the
board
shall
be
conducted
in
the
same
9
manner
as
contested
cases
under
chapter
17A.
In
addition,
the
10
board
shall
require
specificity
in
written
complaints
that
are
11
filed
by
individuals
who
have
personal
knowledge
of
an
alleged
12
violation
and
which
are
accepted
by
the
board,
provide
that
13
jurisdictional
requirements
as
set
by
the
board
are
met
on
14
the
face
of
the
complaint
before
initiating
an
investigation
15
of
allegations,
provide
that
any
investigation
be
limited
16
to
the
allegations
contained
on
the
face
of
the
complaint,
17
provide
for
an
adequate
interval
between
the
receipt
of
a
18
complaint
and
public
notice
of
the
complaint,
permit
parties
to
19
a
complaint
to
mutually
agree
to
a
resolution
of
the
complaint
20
filed
with
the
board,
allow
the
respondent
the
right
to
review
21
any
investigative
report
upon
a
finding
of
probable
cause
for
22
further
action
by
the
board,
require
that
the
conduct
providing
23
the
basis
for
the
complaint
occurred
within
three
years
of
24
discovery
of
the
event
by
the
complainant
unless
good
cause
25
can
be
shown
for
an
extension
of
this
limitation,
and
require
26
complaints
to
be
resolved
within
one
hundred
eighty
days
unless
27
good
cause
can
be
shown
for
an
extension
of
this
limitation.
28
3.
In
addressing
the
failure
of
a
practitioner
to
fulfill
29
contractual
obligations,
the
board
shall
consider
factors
30
beyond
the
practitioner’s
control.
31
4.
The
board
may
subpoena
books,
papers,
records,
and
32
any
other
real
evidence
necessary
for
the
board
to
decide
33
whether
it
should
institute
a
contested
case
hearing.
At
the
34
hearing
the
board
may
administer
oaths
and
issue
subpoenas
to
35
-30-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
30/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
compel
the
attendance
of
witnesses
and
the
production
of
other
1
evidence.
Subpoenas
may
be
issued
by
the
board
to
a
party
2
to
a
hearing,
if
the
party
demonstrates
that
the
evidence
or
3
witnesses’
testimony
is
relevant
and
material
to
the
hearing.
4
Service
of
process
and
subpoenas
for
board
hearings
shall
be
5
conducted
in
accordance
with
the
law
applicable
to
the
service
6
of
process
and
subpoenas
in
civil
actions.
7
5.
Witnesses
subpoenaed
to
appear
before
the
board
shall
be
8
reimbursed
for
mileage
and
necessary
expenses
and
shall
receive
9
per
diem
compensation
by
the
board
unless
the
witness
is
an
10
employee
of
the
state
or
a
political
subdivision,
in
which
case
11
the
witness
shall
receive
reimbursement
only
for
mileage
and
12
necessary
expenses.
13
6.
All
complaint
files,
investigation
files,
other
14
investigation
reports,
and
other
investigative
information
in
15
the
possession
of
the
board
or
its
employees
or
agents,
which
16
relate
to
licensee
discipline,
are
privileged
and
confidential,
17
and
are
not
subject
to
discovery,
subpoena,
or
other
means
of
18
legal
compulsion
for
their
release
to
a
person
other
than
the
19
respondent
and
the
board
and
its
employees
and
agents
involved
20
in
licensee
discipline,
and
are
not
admissible
in
evidence
in
a
21
judicial
or
administrative
proceeding
other
than
the
proceeding
22
involving
licensee
discipline.
A
complaint,
any
amendment
to
23
a
complaint,
and
any
supporting
documents
shall
be
provided
24
to
the
respondent
immediately
upon
the
board’s
determination
25
that
jurisdictional
requirements
have
been
met
and
prior
to
26
the
commencement
of
the
board’s
investigation.
Investigative
27
information
in
the
possession
of
the
board
or
its
employees
or
28
agents
which
relates
to
licensee
discipline
may
be
disclosed
29
to
appropriate
licensing
authorities
within
this
state,
the
30
appropriate
licensing
authority
in
another
state,
the
District
31
of
Columbia,
or
a
territory
or
country
in
which
the
licensee
32
is
licensed
or
has
applied
for
a
license.
A
final
written
33
decision
and
finding
of
fact
of
the
board
in
a
disciplinary
34
proceeding
is
a
public
record.
35
-31-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
31/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
7.
The
board
shall
maintain
a
list
of
qualified
persons
1
who
are
experienced
in
the
educational
system
of
this
state
to
2
serve
as
administrative
law
judges
when
a
hearing
is
requested
3
under
section
279.24.
When
requested
under
section
279.24,
4
the
board
shall
submit
a
list
of
five
qualified
administrative
5
law
judges
to
the
parties.
The
parties
shall
select
one
of
6
the
five
qualified
persons
to
conduct
the
hearing
as
provided
7
in
section
279.24.
The
hearing
shall
be
held
pursuant
to
8
the
provisions
of
chapter
17A
relating
to
contested
cases.
9
The
full
costs
of
the
hearing
shall
be
shared
equally
by
the
10
parties.
11
8.
Board
action
is
final
agency
action
for
purposes
of
12
chapter
17A.
13
Sec.
33.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.106
Reporting
requirements
——
14
complaints.
15
1.
a.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district
or
area
16
education
agency,
the
superintendent
of
a
school
district
or
17
the
chief
administrator
of
an
area
education
agency,
and
the
18
authorities
in
charge
of
a
nonpublic
school
shall
report
to
the
19
board
the
nonrenewal
or
termination,
for
reasons
of
alleged
20
or
actual
misconduct,
of
a
person’s
contract
executed
under
21
sections
279.12,
279.13,
279.15
through
279.21,
279.23,
and
22
279.24,
and
the
resignation
of
a
person
who
holds
a
license,
23
certificate,
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
24
recognition
issued
by
the
department
as
a
result
of
or
25
following
an
incident
or
allegation
of
misconduct
that,
if
26
proven,
would
constitute
a
violation
of
the
rules
adopted
by
27
the
state
board
to
implement
section
256.101,
subsection
9,
28
paragraph
“b”
,
subparagraph
(1),
when
the
school
board,
area
29
education
agency
board,
authorities,
or
reporting
official
30
has
a
good-faith
belief
that
the
incident
occurred
or
the
31
allegation
is
true.
The
department
may
deny
a
license
or
the
32
board
may
revoke
the
license
of
an
administrator
if
the
board
33
finds
by
a
preponderance
of
the
evidence
that
the
administrator
34
failed
to
report
the
termination
or
resignation
of
a
school
35
-32-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
32/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
employee
holding
a
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
1
statement
of
professional
recognition
for
reasons
of
alleged
or
2
actual
misconduct,
as
defined
by
this
subchapter.
3
b.
Information
reported
to
the
board
in
accordance
with
this
4
section
is
privileged
and
confidential,
and
except
as
provided
5
in
section
256.105,
is
not
subject
to
discovery,
subpoena,
or
6
other
means
of
legal
compulsion
for
its
release
to
a
person
7
other
than
the
respondent
and
the
board
and
its
employees
and
8
agents
involved
in
licensee
discipline,
and
is
not
admissible
9
in
evidence
in
a
judicial
or
administrative
proceeding
other
10
than
the
proceeding
involving
licensee
discipline.
The
board
11
shall
review
the
information
reported
to
determine
whether
a
12
complaint
should
be
initiated.
In
making
that
determination,
13
the
board
shall
consider
the
factors
enumerated
in
section
14
256.101,
subsection
9,
paragraph
“a”
.
15
c.
For
purposes
of
this
section,
unless
the
context
16
otherwise
requires,
“misconduct”
means
an
action
disqualifying
17
an
applicant
for
a
license
or
causing
the
license
of
a
person
18
to
be
revoked
or
suspended
in
accordance
with
the
rules
adopted
19
by
the
state
board
to
implement
section
256.101,
subsection
9,
20
paragraph
“b”
,
subparagraph
(1).
21
2.
If,
in
the
course
of
performing
official
duties,
an
22
employee
of
the
department
becomes
aware
of
any
alleged
23
misconduct
by
an
individual
licensed
under
this
subchapter,
the
24
employee
shall
report
the
alleged
misconduct
to
the
board
under
25
rules
adopted
pursuant
to
subsection
1.
26
3.
If
the
board
verifies
through
a
review
of
official
27
records
that
a
teacher
who
holds
a
practitioner’s
license
under
28
this
subchapter
is
assigned
instructional
duties
for
which
the
29
teacher
does
not
hold
the
appropriate
license
or
endorsement,
30
either
by
grade
level
or
subject
area,
by
a
school
district
or
31
accredited
nonpublic
school,
the
board
may
initiate
a
complaint
32
against
the
teacher
and
the
administrator
responsible
for
the
33
inappropriate
assignment
of
instructional
duties.
34
Sec.
34.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.107
Immunities.
35
-33-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
33/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
1.
A
person
shall
not
be
civilly
liable
as
a
result
of
the
1
person’s
acts,
omissions,
or
decisions
that
are
reasonable
and
2
in
good
faith
as
a
member
of
the
board
or
as
an
employee
or
3
agent
of
the
department
in
connection
with
the
person’s
duties
4
under
this
subchapter.
5
2.
A
person
shall
not
be
civilly
liable
as
a
result
6
of
filing
a
report
or
complaint
with
the
board
or
for
the
7
disclosure
to
the
board
or
its
agents
or
employees,
whether
or
8
not
pursuant
to
a
subpoena
of
records,
documents,
testimony,
or
9
other
forms
of
information
in
connection
with
proceedings
of
10
the
board.
However,
such
immunity
from
civil
liability
shall
11
not
apply
if
such
an
act
is
done
with
malice.
12
3.
A
person
shall
not
be
dismissed
from
employment
or
13
discriminated
against
by
an
employer
for
doing
any
of
the
14
following:
15
a.
Filing
a
complaint
with
the
board.
16
b.
Participating
as
a
member,
agent,
or
employee
of
the
17
board.
18
c.
Presenting
testimony
or
other
evidence
to
the
board.
19
4.
An
employer
who
violates
this
section
shall
be
liable
to
20
a
person
aggrieved
by
such
violation
for
actual
and
punitive
21
damages
plus
reasonable
attorney
fees.
22
Sec.
35.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.111
Validity
of
license.
23
1.
A
license
issued
under
state
board
authority
is
valid
for
24
the
period
of
time
for
which
it
is
issued,
unless
the
license
25
is
suspended
or
revoked.
A
license
issued
pursuant
to
this
26
subchapter
is
valid
until
the
last
day
of
the
practitioner’s
27
birth
month
in
the
year
in
which
the
license
expires.
No
28
permanent
licenses
shall
be
issued.
A
person
employed
as
a
29
practitioner
shall
hold
a
valid
license
with
an
endorsement
30
for
the
type
of
service
for
which
the
person
is
employed.
31
This
section
does
not
limit
the
duties
or
powers
of
a
school
32
board
to
select
or
discharge
practitioners
or
to
terminate
33
practitioners’
contracts.
A
professional
development
program,
34
except
for
a
program
offered
by
a
practitioner
preparation
35
-34-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
34/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
institution
or
area
education
agency
and
approved
by
the
state
1
board,
must
possess
a
valid
license
for
the
types
of
programs
2
offered.
3
2.
The
department
or
the
board,
as
applicable,
may
grant
4
or
deny
license
applications,
grant
or
deny
applications
5
for
renewal
of
a
license,
or
suspend
or
revoke
licenses
in
6
accordance
with
the
provisions
of
this
subchapter.
A
denial
7
of
an
application
for
a
license,
a
denial
of
an
application
8
for
renewal,
or
a
suspension
or
revocation
of
a
license
may
be
9
appealed
by
the
practitioner
to
the
department
or
board,
as
10
applicable.
11
3.
The
department
may
issue
emergency
renewal
or
temporary,
12
limited-purpose
licenses
upon
petition
by
a
current
or
13
former
practitioner.
An
emergency
renewal
or
a
temporary,
14
limited-purpose
license
may
be
issued
for
a
period
not
15
to
exceed
two
years,
if
a
petitioner
demonstrates,
to
the
16
satisfaction
of
the
department,
good
cause
for
failure
to
17
comply
with
state
board
requirements
for
a
regular
license
18
and
provides
evidence
that
the
petitioner
will
comply
with
19
state
board
requirements
within
the
period
of
the
emergency
20
or
temporary
license.
Under
exceptional
circumstances,
an
21
emergency
license
may
be
renewed
by
the
department
for
one
22
additional
year.
A
previously
unlicensed
person
is
not
23
eligible
for
an
emergency
or
temporary
license,
except
that
a
24
student
who
is
enrolled
in
a
licensed
practitioner
preparation
25
program
may
be
issued
a
temporary,
limited-purpose
license,
26
without
payment
of
a
fee,
as
part
of
a
practicum
or
internship
27
program.
28
Sec.
36.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.112
License
to
applicants
from
29
other
states
or
countries.
30
1.
The
department
may
provide
for
the
issuance
of
a
license
31
to
an
applicant
from
another
state
or
country
if
the
applicant
32
files
evidence
of
the
possession
of
the
required
or
equivalent
33
requirements
with
the
department.
If
the
applicant
is
the
34
spouse
of
a
military
person
who
is
on
duty
or
in
active
state
35
-35-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
35/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
duty
as
defined
in
section
29A.1,
subsections
9
and
11,
the
1
department
shall
assign
a
consultant
to
be
the
single
point
of
2
contact
for
the
applicant
regarding
nontraditional
licensure.
3
2.
The
state
board
may
enter
into
reciprocity
agreements
4
with
another
state
or
country
for
the
licensing
of
5
practitioners
on
an
equitable
basis
of
mutual
exchange.
6
3.
Practitioner
preparation
and
professional
development
7
programs
offered
in
this
state
by
out-of-state
institutions
8
must
be
approved
by
the
state
board
in
order
to
fulfill
9
requirements
for
licensure
or
renewal
of
a
license
by
an
10
applicant.
11
Sec.
37.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.113
Continuity
of
certificates
12
and
licenses.
13
1.
A
certificate
which
was
issued
by
the
board
of
14
educational
examiners
to
a
practitioner
before
July
1,
15
1989,
continues
to
be
in
force
as
long
as
the
certificate
16
complies
with
the
rules
and
statutes
in
effect
on
July
17
1,
1989.
Requirements
for
the
renewal
of
licenses,
under
18
this
subchapter,
do
not
apply
retroactively
to
renewal
of
19
certificates.
However,
this
section
does
not
limit
the
20
duties
or
powers
of
a
school
board
to
select
or
discharge
21
practitioners
or
to
terminate
practitioners’
contracts.
22
2.
A
practitioner
who
holds
a
certificate
issued
before
23
July
1,
1989,
shall,
upon
application
and
payment
of
a
fee,
24
be
granted
a
license
which
will
permit
the
practitioner
to
25
perform
the
same
duties
and
functions
as
the
practitioner
was
26
entitled
to
perform
with
the
certificate
held
at
the
time
of
27
application.
A
practitioner
shall
be
permitted
to
convert
a
28
permanent
certificate
to
a
term
certificate,
after
July
1,
29
1989,
without
payment
of
a
fee.
30
Sec.
38.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.114
Administrator
mentoring
and
31
induction
——
licenses.
32
1.
Requirements
for
administrator
licensure
beyond
an
33
initial
license
shall
include
completion
of
a
beginning
34
administrator
mentoring
and
induction
program
and
demonstration
35
-36-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
36/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
competence
on
the
administrator
standards
adopted
pursuant
1
to
section
284A.3.
2
2.
The
state
board
shall
adopt
rules
for
administrator
3
licensure
renewal
that
include
credit
for
individual
4
administrator
professional
development
plans
developed
in
5
accordance
with
section
284A.6.
6
3.
An
administrator
formerly
employed
as
an
administrator
7
prior
to
July
1,
2007,
by
an
accredited
nonpublic
school,
or
8
who
within
one
year
prior
to
employment
in
Iowa
was
employed
9
by
an
accredited
school
in
another
state
or
country,
is
exempt
10
from
the
mentoring
and
induction
requirement
under
subsection
11
1
if
the
administrator
can
document
two
years
of
successful
12
administrator
experience
and
meet
or
exceed
the
requirements
13
contained
in
rules
adopted
pursuant
to
this
subchapter
for
14
endorsement
and
licensure.
15
Sec.
39.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.115
National
certification.
16
The
state
board
shall
review
the
standards
for
teacher’s
17
certificates
adopted
by
the
national
board
for
professional
18
teaching
standards.
If
the
standards
required
by
the
national
19
board
meet
or
exceed
the
requirements
for
an
endorsement
or
20
license
issued
under
rules
adopted
pursuant
to
this
subchapter,
21
the
department
shall
issue
an
endorsement
or
license
to
an
22
applicant
for
such
an
endorsement
or
license
if
the
applicant
23
holds
a
valid
certificate
issued
by
the
national
board.
24
Sec.
40.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.116
Paraeducator
certificates.
25
The
state
board
shall
establish
a
voluntary
certification
26
system
for
paraeducators.
The
state
board
shall
specify
in
27
rule
the
rights,
responsibilities,
levels,
and
qualifications
28
for
the
certificate.
Applicants
shall
be
disqualified
for
29
any
reason
specified
in
section
256.101,
subsection
9,
except
30
that
the
department
may
issue
a
paraeducator
certificate
to
a
31
person
who
is
at
least
eighteen
years
of
age.
A
person
holding
32
a
paraeducator
certificate
shall
not
perform
the
duties
of
33
a
licensed
practitioner.
A
paraeducator
certificate
issued
34
pursuant
to
this
section
shall
not
be
considered
a
teacher
35
-37-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
37/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
or
administrator
license
for
any
purpose
specified
by
law,
1
including
the
purposes
specified
under
this
subchapter
or
2
chapter
279.
3
Sec.
41.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.117
Authorizations
——
coaching
4
——
school
business
officials.
5
1.
The
minimum
requirements
for
the
issuance
of
a
coaching
6
authorization
to
an
applicant
under
this
subchapter
include
the
7
following:
8
a.
Successful
completion
of
one
semester
credit
hour
9
or
ten
contact
hours
in
a
course
relating
to
knowledge
and
10
understanding
of
the
structure
and
function
of
the
human
body
11
in
relation
to
physical
activity.
12
b.
Successful
completion
of
one
semester
credit
hour
13
or
ten
contact
hours
in
a
course
relating
to
knowledge
and
14
understanding
of
human
growth
and
development
of
children
and
15
youth
in
relation
to
physical
activity.
16
c.
Successful
completion
of
two
semester
credit
hours
or
17
twenty
contact
hours
in
a
course
relating
to
knowledge
and
18
understanding
of
the
prevention
and
care
of
athletic
injuries
19
and
medical
and
safety
problems
relating
to
physical
activity.
20
d.
Successful
completion
of
one
semester
credit
hour
or
ten
21
contact
hours
relating
to
knowledge
and
understanding
of
the
22
techniques
and
theory
of
coaching
interscholastic
athletics.
23
e.
Attainment
of
at
least
eighteen
years
of
age.
24
2.
a.
The
department
shall
issue
a
school
business
official
25
authorization
to
an
individual
who
successfully
completes
a
26
training
program
that
meets
the
standards
set
by
the
state
27
board
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
30,
and
who
28
complies
with
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
pursuant
to
29
subsection
4.
30
b.
A
person
hired
on
or
after
July
1,
2012,
as
a
school
31
business
official
responsible
for
the
financial
operations
of
32
a
school
district
who
is
without
prior
experience
as
a
school
33
business
official
in
Iowa
shall
either
hold
the
school
business
34
official
authorization
issued
pursuant
to
paragraph
“a”
or
35
-38-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
38/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
obtain
the
authorization
within
two
years
of
the
start
date
of
1
employment
as
a
school
business
official.
2
c.
An
individual
employed
as
a
school
business
official
3
prior
to
July
1,
2012,
who
meets
the
requirements
of
the
4
state
board,
other
than
the
training
program
requirements
of
5
paragraph
“a”
,
shall
be
issued,
with
no
fee
for
issuance,
an
6
initial
authorization,
but
shall
meet
renewal
requirements
for
7
an
authorization
within
the
time
period
specified
by
the
state
8
board.
9
3.
The
department
shall
issue
a
school
administration
10
manager
authorization
to
an
individual
who
successfully
11
completes
a
training
program
that
meets
the
standards
set
by
12
the
state
board
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
30,
and
13
who
complies
with
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
pursuant
to
14
subsection
4.
15
4.
The
state
board
shall
work
with
institutions
of
16
higher
education,
private
colleges
and
universities,
17
community
colleges,
area
education
agencies,
and
professional
18
organizations
to
ensure
that
the
courses
and
programs
required
19
for
authorization
under
this
section
are
offered
throughout
the
20
state
at
convenient
times
and
at
a
reasonable
cost.
21
5.
The
department
shall
establish
a
statewide
school
22
administration
manager
training
program
that
complies
with
the
23
standards
and
procedures
established
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
24
subsection
30,
paragraph
“b”
.
Participation
in
the
program
is
25
voluntary
for
school
districts,
charter
schools,
and
accredited
26
nonpublic
schools
and
their
employees.
27
Sec.
42.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.121
Specific
criteria
for
teacher
28
preparation
and
certain
educators.
29
1.
Pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
5,
the
state
board
30
shall
adopt
rules
requiring
all
higher
education
institutions
31
providing
approved
practitioner
preparation
programs
to
do
the
32
following:
33
a.
Require
any
candidate
for
admission
to
the
practitioner
34
preparation
program
to
have
a
cumulative
postsecondary
grade
35
-39-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
39/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
point
average
at
the
time
of
application
of
at
least
three
on
a
1
four-point
scale,
or
its
equivalent
if
another
scale
is
used.
2
b.
(1)
Administer
a
basic
skills
test,
which
has
been
3
approved
by
the
director,
to
practitioner
preparation
program
4
admission
candidates.
Candidates
who
do
not
successfully
5
pass
the
test
with
a
score
above
the
twenty-fifth
percentile
6
nationally
shall
be
denied
admission
to
the
program.
7
(2)
A
student
shall
not
successfully
complete
the
program
8
unless
the
student
achieves
scores
above
the
twenty-fifth
9
percentile
nationally
on
an
assessment
approved
by
the
director
10
in
pedagogy
and
at
least
one
content
area.
11
c.
Include
preparation
in
reading
programs
and
integrate
12
reading
strategies
into
content
area
methods
coursework.
13
d.
Include
in
the
professional
education
program,
14
preparation
that
contributes
to
the
education
of
students
15
with
disabilities
and
students
who
are
gifted
and
talented,
16
and
preparation
in
classroom
management
addressing
high-risk
17
behaviors
including
but
not
limited
to
behaviors
related
to
18
substance
abuse.
Preparation
required
under
this
paragraph
19
must
be
successfully
completed
before
graduation
from
the
20
practitioner
preparation
program.
21
2.
An
applicant
for
licensure
under
this
subchapter
shall
22
have
successfully
completed
a
professional
education
program
23
containing
the
subject
matter
specified
in
this
section.
24
Sec.
43.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.122
Rules
for
practitioner
25
preparation
programs.
26
The
state
board
shall
adopt
rules
pursuant
to
chapter
17A
27
which
require
that
an
approved
practitioner
preparation
program
28
include
all
of
the
following:
29
1.
A
requirement
that
each
student
admitted
to
the
program
30
must
participate
in
at
least
fifty
hours
of
field
experience
31
that
includes
both
observation
and
participation
in
teaching
32
activities
in
a
variety
of
school
settings;
at
least
ten
hours
33
of
which
shall
occur
prior
to
a
student’s
acceptance
in
the
34
program.
The
student
teaching
experience
shall
be
a
minimum
of
35
-40-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
40/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
fifteen
weeks
in
duration
during
the
student’s
final
year
of
1
the
practitioner
preparation
program.
2
2.
A
requirement
that
faculty
members
in
professional
3
education
maintain
an
ongoing
involvement
in
activities
in
4
elementary,
middle,
or
secondary
schools.
The
activities
shall
5
include
at
least
forty
hours
of
team
teaching
during
a
period
6
not
exceeding
two
years
in
duration
at
the
elementary,
middle,
7
or
secondary
level.
8
3.
A
requirement
that
the
program
include
instruction
9
in
skills
and
strategies
to
be
used
in
classroom
management
10
of
individuals,
and
of
small
and
large
groups,
under
varying
11
conditions;
skills
for
communicating
and
working
constructively
12
with
pupils,
teachers,
administrators,
and
parents;
and
skills
13
for
understanding
the
role
of
the
state
board
and
the
functions
14
of
other
education
agencies
in
the
state.
The
requirement
15
shall
be
based
upon
recommendations
of
the
director
after
16
consultation
with
teacher
education
faculty
members
in
colleges
17
and
universities.
18
4.
A
requirement
that
prescribes
minimum
experiences
and
19
responsibilities
to
be
accomplished
during
the
student
teaching
20
experience
by
the
student
teacher
and
by
the
cooperating
21
teacher
based
upon
recommendations
of
the
director
after
22
consultation
with
teacher
education
faculty
members
in
23
colleges
and
universities.
The
student
teaching
experience
24
shall
include
opportunities
for
the
student
teacher
to
become
25
knowledgeable
about
the
Iowa
teaching
standards,
including
a
26
mock
evaluation
performed
by
the
cooperating
teacher.
The
27
mock
evaluation
shall
not
be
used
as
an
assessment
tool
by
28
the
practitioner
preparation
program.
The
student
teaching
29
experience
shall
consist
of
interactive
experiences
involving
30
practitioner
preparation
program
personnel,
the
student
31
teacher,
the
cooperating
teacher,
and
administrative
personnel
32
from
the
cooperating
teacher’s
school
district.
33
5.
A
requirement
that
each
approved
practitioner
34
preparation
program
or
professional
development
institution
35
-41-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
41/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
annually
offer
a
workshop
of
at
least
one
day
in
duration
for
1
prospective
cooperating
teachers.
The
workshop
shall
define
2
the
objectives
of
the
student
teaching
experience,
review
3
the
responsibilities
of
the
cooperating
teacher,
and
provide
4
the
cooperating
teacher
other
information
and
assistance
the
5
institution
deems
necessary.
6
6.
A
requirement
that
practitioner
preparation
students
7
receive
instruction
in
the
use
of
electronic
technology
for
8
classroom
and
instructional
purposes.
9
7.
A
requirement
that
each
institution
with
an
approved
10
practitioner
preparation
program
annually
solicit
the
views
11
of
the
education
community
regarding
the
institution’s
12
practitioner
preparation
program.
The
institution
shall
13
collect
the
education
community’s
views
and
the
institution’s
14
findings
and
recommendations
in
a
report
which
shall
be
15
submitted
to
the
department.
The
department
shall
publish
the
16
report
on
its
internet
site.
17
8.
A
requirement
that
an
approved
practitioner
preparation
18
program
submit
evidence
that
the
college
or
department
of
19
education
is
communicating
with
other
colleges
or
departments
20
in
the
institution
so
that
practitioner
preparation
students
21
may
integrate
teaching
methodology
with
subject
matter
areas
22
of
specialization.
23
9.
A
requirement
that
an
approved
practitioner
preparation
24
program
submit
evidence
that
the
evaluation
of
the
performance
25
of
a
student
teacher
is
a
cooperative
process
that
involves
26
both
the
faculty
member
supervising
the
student
teacher
and
27
the
cooperating
teacher.
The
rules
shall
require
that
each
28
institution
develop
a
written
evaluation
procedure
for
use
29
by
the
cooperating
teacher
and
a
form
for
evaluating
student
30
teachers,
and
require
that
a
copy
of
the
completed
form
be
31
included
in
the
student
teacher’s
permanent
record.
32
Sec.
44.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.123
Student
teaching
and
other
33
educational
experiences.
34
If
the
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
for
issuance
of
a
35
-42-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
42/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
license
or
endorsement
license
require
an
applicant
to
complete
1
work
in
student
teaching,
prestudent
teaching
experiences,
2
field
experiences,
practicums,
clinicals,
or
internships,
an
3
institution
with
a
practitioner
preparation
program
approved
by
4
the
state
board
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
3,
shall
5
enter
into
a
written
contract
with
any
Iowa
school
district,
6
accredited
nonpublic
school,
preschool
registered
or
licensed
7
by
the
department
of
human
services,
or
area
education
agency
8
under
terms
and
conditions
as
agreed
upon
by
the
contracting
9
parties.
The
terms
and
conditions
of
a
written
contract
10
entered
into
with
a
preschool
pursuant
to
this
section
shall
11
provide
that
a
student
teacher
be
under
the
direct
supervision
12
of
an
appropriately
licensed
cooperating
teacher
who
is
13
employed
to
teach
at
the
preschool.
A
student
teaching
or
14
engaged
in
preservice
licensure
activities
in
a
school
district
15
under
the
terms
of
such
a
contract
are
entitled
to
the
same
16
protection,
under
section
670.8,
as
is
afforded
by
that
section
17
to
officers
and
employees
of
the
school
district,
during
the
18
time
the
student
is
so
assigned.
19
Sec.
45.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.124
Alternative
licensure
and
20
endorsement.
21
1.
The
state
board
shall
establish
alternative
licensure
22
pathways
for
an
initial
teacher
license
and
an
initial
23
administrator
license
and
endorsement.
24
2.
The
alternative
pathway
for
an
initial
teacher
license
25
shall
include
all
of
the
following
components:
26
a.
A
requirement
that
the
applicant
for
the
alternative
27
pathway
to
an
initial
teacher
license
meet
all
of
the
following
28
criteria:
29
(1)
Hold,
at
a
minimum,
a
bachelor’s
degree
from
a
30
regionally
accredited
postsecondary
institution
and
twenty-four
31
postsecondary
credit
hours
in
the
content
area
to
be
taught
at
32
the
licensure
level
sought
by
the
applicant;
or,
in
order
to
33
teach
a
foreign
language,
the
applicant
shall
hold
at
least
a
34
bachelor’s
degree
and
be
a
native
speaker
of
the
language
to
35
-43-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
43/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
be
taught.
1
(2)
Have
successfully
passed
a
background
check
conducted
2
in
accordance
with
section
256.102,
subsection
8.
3
(3)
Have
at
least
three
recent
consecutive
years
of
4
successful,
relevant
work
experience.
5
(4)
Have
successfully
passed
a
basic
skills
test,
approved
6
by
the
director,
for
acceptance.
An
applicant
utilizing
the
7
alternative
pathway
to
an
initial
teacher
license
shall
not
8
be
issued
such
a
license
unless
the
student
achieves
scores
9
above
the
twenty-fifth
percentile
nationally
on
an
examination
10
approved
by
the
director
for
knowledge
of
pedagogies
and
in
at
11
least
one
content
area.
12
(5)
Have
a
cumulative
postgraduate
grade
point
average
of
at
13
least
three
on
a
four-point
scale,
or
its
equivalent
if
another
14
grade
scale
is
used.
15
b.
A
requirement
that
the
person
issued
an
initial
teacher
16
license
pursuant
to
this
subsection
shall,
during
the
person’s
17
first
three
years
of
teaching,
successfully
complete
a
18
beginning
teacher
mentoring
and
induction
program
pursuant
19
to
section
284.5,
and
shall
successfully
complete
eighteen
20
postsecondary
credit
hours
of
pedagogy
coursework
before
the
21
person
may
be
issued
a
license
beyond
the
initial
license.
22
3.
The
alternative
pathway
for
an
initial
administrator
23
license
shall
include
all
of
the
following
components:
24
a.
A
requirement
that
the
applicant
for
the
alternative
25
pathway
to
an
initial
administrator
license
meet
all
of
the
26
following
criteria:
27
(1)
Hold,
at
a
minimum,
a
bachelor’s
degree
from
a
28
regionally
accredited
postsecondary
institution.
29
(2)
Have
successfully
passed
a
background
check
conducted
30
in
accordance
with
section
256.102,
subsection
8.
31
b.
A
requirement
that
a
person
who
is
issued
an
initial
32
administrator
license
through
the
alternative
pathway
specified
33
by
this
subsection
may
be
employed
by
a
school
district
or
34
accredited
nonpublic
school
and,
for
the
first
consecutive
35
-44-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
44/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
three
years
of
employment
as
a
building
principal,
shall
1
be
supervised
and
mentored
by
a
person
who
holds
a
valid
2
professional
administrator
license.
3
4.
A
person
with
at
least
five
recent
years
of
successful
4
experience
as
a
professional
educator,
and
who
is
enrolled
in
5
an
alternative
principal
licensing
program
approved
by
the
6
state
board,
may
qualify
for
an
initial
administrator
license.
7
5.
A
person
with
at
least
five
recent
years
of
successful
8
management
experience
in
business;
industry;
local,
state,
9
or
federal
government;
or
the
military
service
of
the
United
10
States,
and
who
has
successfully
completed
an
alternative
11
principal
licensing
program
approved
by
the
state
board,
may
12
qualify
for
an
initial
administrator
license.
13
6.
a.
The
alternative
pathway
for
an
initial
administrator
14
endorsement
for
school
superintendents
and
area
education
15
agency
administrators
shall
require
an
applicant
to
meet
all
of
16
the
following
criteria:
17
(1)
Hold,
at
a
minimum,
a
bachelor’s
degree
from
a
18
regionally
accredited
postsecondary
institution.
19
(2)
Have
successfully
passed
a
background
check
conducted
20
in
accordance
with
section
256.102,
subsection
8.
21
(3)
Have
at
least
five
recent
years
of
successful,
relevant
22
experience
as
a
professional
educator
or
management
experience
23
in
business;
industry;
local,
state,
or
federal
government;
or
24
the
military
service
of
the
United
States.
25
b.
A
person
issued
an
initial
administrator
endorsement
26
for
superintendents
or
area
education
agency
administrators
27
under
this
subsection
shall
successfully
complete
a
beginning
28
mentoring
and
induction
program
with
a
mentor
who
is
a
29
superintendent
or
area
education
agency
administrator,
as
30
appropriate.
31
c.
A
person
issued
an
initial
administrator
endorsement
32
for
superintendents
or
area
education
agency
administrators
33
pursuant
to
this
subsection,
who
successfully
completes
three
34
years
of
experience
as
a
superintendent
or
area
education
35
-45-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
45/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
agency
administrator,
may
be
issued
a
license
beyond
the
1
initial
administrator
endorsement.
2
7.
Upon
application,
a
person
who
holds
an
initial
3
administrator
license
issued
pursuant
to
subsection
3,
and
who
4
has
three
years
of
successful
experience
as
a
principal,
shall
5
be
issued
a
professional
administrator
license.
6
Sec.
46.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.125
Mentoring
and
induction
7
requirement.
8
1.
Requirements
for
teacher
licensure
beyond
an
initial
9
license
shall
include
successful
completion
of
a
beginning
10
teacher
mentoring
and
induction
program
pursuant
to
section
11
284.5.
12
2.
A
teacher
from
another
state
or
country
is
exempt
from
13
the
requirement
of
subsection
1
if
the
teacher
can
document
14
five
years
of
successful
teaching
experience
and
meet
or
15
exceed
the
requirements
contained
in
rules
adopted
under
this
16
subchapter
for
endorsement
and
licensure.
17
Sec.
47.
Section
20.17,
subsection
11,
paragraph
a,
Code
18
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
19
a.
In
the
absence
of
an
impasse
agreement
negotiated
20
pursuant
to
section
20.19
which
provides
for
a
different
21
completion
date,
public
employees
represented
by
a
certified
22
employee
organization
who
are
teachers
licensed
under
chapter
23
272
256
and
who
are
employed
by
a
public
employer
which
is
a
24
school
district
or
area
education
agency
shall
complete
the
25
negotiation
of
a
proposed
collective
bargaining
agreement
26
not
later
than
May
31
of
the
year
when
the
agreement
is
to
27
become
effective.
The
board
shall
provide,
by
rule,
a
date
on
28
which
impasse
items
in
such
cases
must
be
submitted
to
binding
29
arbitration
and
for
such
other
procedures
as
deemed
necessary
30
to
provide
for
the
completion
of
negotiations
of
proposed
31
collective
bargaining
agreements
not
later
than
May
31.
The
32
date
selected
for
the
mandatory
submission
of
impasse
items
33
to
binding
arbitration
in
such
cases
shall
be
sufficiently
in
34
advance
of
May
31
to
ensure
that
the
arbitrator’s
award
can
be
35
-46-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
46/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
reasonably
made
by
May
31.
1
Sec.
48.
Section
20.19,
subsection
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
2
to
read
as
follows:
3
1.
As
the
first
step
in
the
performance
of
their
duty
to
4
bargain,
the
public
employer
and
the
employee
organization
5
shall
endeavor
to
agree
upon
impasse
procedures.
Such
6
agreement
shall
provide
for
implementation
of
these
impasse
7
procedures
not
later
than
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
to
8
the
certified
budget
submission
date
of
the
public
employer.
9
However,
if
public
employees
represented
by
the
employee
10
organization
are
teachers
licensed
under
chapter
272
256
,
and
11
the
public
employer
is
a
school
district
or
area
education
12
agency,
the
agreement
shall
provide
for
implementation
of
13
impasse
procedures
not
later
than
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
14
to
May
31
of
the
year
when
the
collective
bargaining
agreement
15
is
to
become
effective.
If
the
public
employer
is
a
community
16
college,
the
agreement
shall
provide
for
implementation
of
17
impasse
procedures
not
later
than
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
18
to
May
31
of
the
year
when
the
collective
bargaining
agreement
19
is
to
become
effective.
If
the
public
employer
is
not
subject
20
to
the
budget
certification
requirements
of
section
24.17
and
21
other
applicable
sections,
the
agreement
shall
provide
for
22
implementation
of
impasse
procedures
not
later
than
one
hundred
23
twenty
days
prior
to
the
date
the
next
fiscal
or
budget
year
of
24
the
public
employer
commences.
If
the
parties
fail
to
agree
25
upon
impasse
procedures
under
the
provisions
of
this
section
,
26
the
impasse
procedures
provided
in
sections
20.20
to
20.22
27
shall
apply.
28
Sec.
49.
Section
20.20,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
29
follows:
30
20.20
Mediation.
31
In
the
absence
of
an
impasse
agreement
negotiated
pursuant
32
to
section
20.19
or
the
failure
of
either
party
to
utilize
its
33
procedures,
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
to
the
certified
34
budget
submission
date,
or
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
to
35
-47-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
47/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
May
31
of
the
year
when
the
collective
bargaining
agreement
1
is
to
become
effective
if
public
employees
represented
by
the
2
employee
organization
are
teachers
licensed
under
chapter
3
272
256
and
the
public
employer
is
a
school
district
or
4
area
education
agency,
the
board
shall,
upon
the
request
of
5
either
party,
appoint
an
impartial
and
disinterested
person
6
to
act
as
mediator.
If
the
public
employer
is
a
community
7
college,
and
in
the
absence
of
an
impasse
agreement
negotiated
8
pursuant
to
section
20.19
or
the
failure
of
either
party
to
9
utilize
its
procedures,
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
to
May
10
31
of
the
year
when
the
collective
bargaining
agreement
is
to
11
become
effective,
the
board,
upon
the
request
of
either
party,
12
shall
appoint
an
impartial
and
disinterested
person
to
act
as
13
mediator.
If
the
public
employer
is
not
subject
to
the
budget
14
certification
requirements
of
section
24.17
or
other
applicable
15
sections
and
in
the
absence
of
an
impasse
agreement
negotiated
16
pursuant
to
section
20.19
,
or
the
failure
of
either
party
to
17
utilize
its
procedures,
one
hundred
twenty
days
prior
to
the
18
date
the
next
fiscal
or
budget
year
of
the
public
employer
19
commences,
the
board,
upon
the
request
of
either
party,
shall
20
appoint
an
impartial
and
disinterested
person
to
act
as
a
21
mediator.
It
shall
be
the
function
of
the
mediator
to
bring
22
the
parties
together
to
effectuate
a
settlement
of
the
dispute,
23
but
the
mediator
may
not
compel
the
parties
to
agree.
24
Sec.
50.
Section
232.69,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
25
subparagraph
(4),
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
26
follows:
27
(4)
A
licensed
school
employee,
certified
para-educator
28
paraeducator
,
holder
of
a
coaching
authorization
issued
29
under
section
272.31
256.117
,
or
an
instructor
employed
by
a
30
community
college.
31
Sec.
51.
Section
232.69,
subsection
3,
paragraph
a,
Code
32
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
33
a.
For
the
purposes
of
this
subsection
,
“licensing
34
board”
means
a
board
designated
in
section
147.13
,
the
board
35
-48-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
48/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
department
of
educational
examiners
created
education
in
1
accordance
with
section
272.2
256.102
,
or
a
licensing
board
as
2
defined
in
section
272C.1
.
3
Sec.
52.
Section
235A.15,
subsection
2,
paragraph
e,
4
subparagraph
(9),
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
5
follows:
6
(9)
To
the
department
of
education
or
the
board
of
7
educational
examiners
created
under
chapter
272
256
for
8
purposes
of
determining
whether
a
license,
certificate,
9
or
authorization
should
be
issued,
denied,
or
revoked
in
10
accordance
with
chapter
256
.
11
Sec.
53.
Section
235B.6,
subsection
2,
paragraph
e,
12
subparagraph
(13),
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
13
follows:
14
(13)
To
the
department
of
education
or
the
board
of
15
educational
examiners
created
under
chapter
272
256
for
16
purposes
of
determining
whether
a
license,
certificate,
17
or
authorization
should
be
issued,
denied,
or
revoked
in
18
accordance
with
chapter
256
.
19
Sec.
54.
Section
235B.16,
subsection
5,
paragraph
a,
Code
20
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
21
a.
For
the
purposes
of
this
subsection
,
“licensing
22
board”
means
a
board
designated
in
section
147.13
,
the
board
23
department
of
educational
examiners
created
education
as
24
provided
in
section
272.2
256.102
,
or
a
licensing
board
as
25
defined
in
section
272C.1
.
26
Sec.
55.
Section
256.7,
subsections
5,
22,
and
30,
Code
27
Supplement
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
28
5.
Adopt
rules
under
chapter
17A
for
carrying
out
the
29
responsibilities
of
the
state
board
and
of
the
department
30
pursuant
to
law
.
31
22.
Adopt
rules
and
a
procedure
for
the
approval
of
32
para-educator
paraeducator
preparation
programs
offered
by
33
a
public
school
district,
area
education
agency,
community
34
college,
institution
of
higher
education
under
the
state
board
35
-49-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
49/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
regents,
or
an
accredited
private
institution
as
defined
1
in
section
261.9,
subsection
1
.
The
programs
shall
train
2
and
recommend
individuals
for
para-educator
paraeducator
3
certification
under
section
272.12
256.116
.
4
30.
Set
standards
and
procedures
for
the
approval
of
5
training
programs
for
individuals
who
seek
an
authorization
6
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
section
7
256.117
for
employment
the
following:
8
a.
Employment
as
a
school
business
official
responsible
for
9
the
financial
operations
of
a
school
district.
10
b.
Employment
as
a
school
administration
manager
responsible
11
for
assisting
a
school
principal
in
performing
noninstructional
12
duties.
13
Sec.
56.
Section
256.9,
subsections
46
and
52,
Code
14
Supplement
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
15
46.
Develop
core
knowledge
and
skill
criteria,
based
16
upon
the
Iowa
teaching
standards,
for
the
evaluation,
the
17
advancement,
and
for
teacher
career
development
purposes
18
pursuant
to
chapter
284
.
The
criteria
shall
further
define
the
19
characteristics
of
quality
teaching
as
established
by
the
Iowa
20
teaching
standards.
The
director
,
in
consultation
with
the
21
board
of
educational
examiners,
shall
also
develop
a
transition
22
plan
for
implementation
of
the
career
development
standards
23
developed
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
25
,
with
regard
24
to
licensure
renewal
requirements.
The
plan
shall
include
a
25
requirement
that
practitioners
be
allowed
credit
for
career
26
development
completed
prior
to
implementation
of
the
career
27
development
standards
developed
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
28
subsection
25
.
29
52.
Establish
and
maintain
a
process
and
a
procedure
,
in
30
cooperation
with
the
board
of
educational
examiners,
to
compare
31
a
practitioner’s
teaching
assignment
with
the
license
and
32
endorsements
held
by
the
practitioner.
The
director
may
report
33
noncompliance
issues
identified
by
this
process
to
the
board
34
of
educational
examiners
pursuant
to
section
272.15
256.106
,
35
-50-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
50/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
subsection
3
.
1
Sec.
57.
Section
256.11,
subsections
9,
9A,
and
9B,
Code
2
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
3
9.
Beginning
July
1,
2006
2012
,
each
school
district
shall
4
have
a
qualified
teacher
librarian
who
shall
be
licensed
by
5
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
this
chapter
272
.
6
The
state
board
shall
establish
in
rule
a
definition
of
and
7
standards
for
an
articulated
sequential
kindergarten
through
8
grade
twelve
media
program.
A
school
district
that
entered
9
into
a
contract
with
an
individual
for
employment
as
a
media
10
specialist
or
librarian
prior
to
June
1,
2006,
shall
be
11
considered
to
be
in
compliance
with
this
subsection
until
June
12
30,
2011,
if
the
individual
is
making
annual
progress
toward
13
meeting
the
requirements
for
a
teacher
librarian
endorsement
14
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
15
272
.
A
school
district
that
entered
into
a
contract
with
an
16
individual
for
employment
as
a
media
specialist
or
librarian
17
who
holds
at
least
a
master’s
degree
in
library
and
information
18
studies
shall
be
considered
to
be
in
compliance
with
this
19
subsection
until
the
individual
leaves
the
employ
of
the
school
20
district.
21
9A.
Beginning
July
1,
2007
2012
,
each
school
district
shall
22
have
a
qualified
guidance
counselor
who
shall
be
licensed
by
23
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
this
chapter
272
.
24
Each
school
district
shall
work
toward
the
goal
of
having
one
25
qualified
guidance
counselor
for
every
three
hundred
fifty
26
students
enrolled
in
the
school
district.
The
state
board
27
shall
establish
in
rule
a
definition
of
and
standards
for
28
an
articulated
sequential
kindergarten
through
grade
twelve
29
guidance
and
counseling
program.
30
9B.
Beginning
July
1,
2007
2012
,
each
school
district
shall
31
have
a
school
nurse
to
provide
health
services
to
its
students.
32
Each
school
district
shall
work
toward
the
goal
of
having
one
33
school
nurse
for
every
seven
hundred
fifty
students
enrolled
in
34
the
school
district.
For
purposes
of
this
subsection
,
“school
35
-51-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
51/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
nurse”
means
a
person
who
holds
an
endorsement
or
a
statement
of
1
professional
recognition
for
school
nurses
issued
by
the
board
2
of
educational
examiners
under
this
chapter
272
.
3
Sec.
58.
Section
256.36,
subsection
3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
4
to
read
as
follows:
5
3.
The
board
of
educational
examiners
department
may
6
develop
recommendations
for
specific
changes
in
the
licensing
7
requirements
for
math
and
science
teachers.
8
Sec.
59.
Section
256.44,
subsection
1,
unnumbered
paragraph
9
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
10
A
national
board
certification
pilot
project
is
established
11
to
be
administered
by
the
department
of
education.
A
teacher,
12
as
defined
in
section
272.1
256.100
,
who
registers
for
or
13
achieves
national
board
for
professional
teaching
standards
14
certification,
and
who
is
employed
by
a
school
district
in
Iowa
15
and
receiving
a
salary
as
a
classroom
teacher,
may
be
eligible
16
for
the
following:
17
Sec.
60.
Section
256C.3,
subsection
2,
paragraph
a,
18
subparagraph
(2),
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
19
(2)
The
individual
is
appropriately
licensed
under
chapter
20
272
256
and
meets
requirements
under
chapter
284
.
21
Sec.
61.
Section
256F.7,
subsection
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
22
to
read
as
follows:
23
1.
A
charter
school
or
the
boards
participating
in
an
24
innovation
zone
consortium
shall
employ
or
contract
with
25
necessary
teachers
and
administrators,
as
defined
in
section
26
272.1
256.100
,
who
hold
a
valid
license
with
an
endorsement
for
27
the
type
of
service
for
which
the
teacher
or
administrator
is
28
employed.
29
Sec.
62.
Section
258.4,
subsection
5,
Code
2011,
is
amended
30
to
read
as
follows:
31
5.
Make
recommendations
to
the
state
board
of
educational
32
examiners
of
education
relating
to
the
enforcement
of
rules
33
prescribing
standards
for
teachers
of
subjects
listed
in
34
subsection
2
in
accredited
schools,
departments,
and
classes.
35
-52-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
52/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
Sec.
63.
Section
258.5,
unnumbered
paragraph
1,
Code
2011,
1
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
2
If
a
school
corporation
maintains
an
approved
vocational
3
school,
department,
or
classes
in
accordance
with
the
rules
4
adopted
by
the
state
board
,
and
rules
and
standards
adopted
5
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
of
education
,
and
the
6
state
plan
for
vocational
education
,
adopted
by
the
board
7
for
vocational
education
and
approved
by
the
United
States
8
department
of
education,
the
director
of
the
department
of
9
education
shall
reimburse
the
school
corporation
at
the
end
10
of
the
fiscal
year
for
its
expenditures
for
salaries
and
11
authorized
travel
of
vocational
teachers
from
federal
and
state
12
funds.
However,
a
school
corporation
shall
not
receive
from
13
federal
and
state
funds
a
larger
amount
than
one-half
the
sum
14
which
has
been
expended
by
the
school
corporation
for
that
15
particular
type
of
program.
If
federal
and
state
funds
are
not
16
sufficient
to
make
the
reimbursement
to
the
extent
provided
in
17
this
section
,
the
director
shall
prorate
the
respective
amounts
18
available
to
the
corporations
entitled
to
reimbursement.
19
Sec.
64.
Section
261.111,
subsection
8,
Code
2011,
is
20
amended
to
read
as
follows:
21
8.
For
purposes
of
this
section
,
unless
the
context
22
otherwise
requires,
“teacher”
means
the
same
as
defined
in
23
section
272.1
256.100
.
24
Sec.
65.
Section
261.112,
subsection
1,
Code
Supplement
25
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
26
1.
A
teacher
shortage
loan
forgiveness
program
is
27
established
to
be
administered
by
the
commission.
A
teacher
28
is
eligible
for
the
program
if
the
teacher
is
practicing
in
29
a
teacher
shortage
area
as
designated
by
the
department
of
30
education
pursuant
to
subsection
2
.
For
purposes
of
this
31
section
,
“teacher”
means
an
individual
holding
a
practitioner’s
32
license
issued
under
chapter
272
256
,
who
is
employed
in
a
33
nonadministrative
position
in
a
designated
shortage
area
by
a
34
school
district
or
area
education
agency
pursuant
to
a
contract
35
-53-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
53/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
issued
by
a
board
of
directors
under
section
279.13
.
1
Sec.
66.
Section
261E.3,
subsection
2,
paragraph
a,
2
subparagraph
(6),
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
3
follows:
4
(6)
If
the
instruction
for
any
program
authorized
by
5
this
chapter
is
provided
at
a
school
district
facility
or
a
6
neutral
site,
the
teacher
or
instructor
shall
have
successfully
7
passed
a
background
investigation
conducted
in
accordance
with
8
section
272.2
256.102
,
subsection
17
7
,
prior
to
providing
such
9
instruction.
For
purposes
of
this
section
,
“neutral
site”
means
10
a
facility
that
is
not
owned
or
operated
by
an
institution.
11
Sec.
67.
Section
261E.3,
subsection
2,
paragraph
e,
Code
12
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
13
e.
An
individual
under
suspension
or
revocation
of
an
14
educational
license
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
15
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
256
16
shall
not
be
allowed
to
provide
instruction
for
any
program
17
authorized
by
this
chapter
.
18
Sec.
68.
Section
261E.4,
subsection
3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
19
to
read
as
follows:
20
3.
A
school
district
shall
ensure
that
advanced
placement
21
course
teachers
or
instructors
are
appropriately
licensed
by
22
the
board
of
educational
examiners
in
accordance
with
chapter
23
272
256
and
meet
the
minimum
certification
requirements
of
the
24
national
organization
that
administers
the
advanced
placement
25
program.
26
Sec.
69.
Section
262.9,
subsection
2,
Code
Supplement
2011,
27
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
28
2.
Elect
a
president
of
each
of
the
institutions
of
higher
29
learning;
a
superintendent
of
each
of
the
other
institutions;
30
a
treasurer
and
a
secretarial
officer
for
each
institution
31
annually;
professors,
instructors,
officers,
and
employees;
32
and
fix
their
compensation.
Sections
279.12
through
279.19
33
and
section
279.27
apply
to
employees
of
the
Iowa
braille
and
34
sight
saving
school
and
the
state
school
for
the
deaf,
who
35
-54-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
54/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
are
licensed
pursuant
to
chapter
272
256
.
In
following
those
1
sections
in
chapter
279
,
the
references
to
boards
of
directors
2
of
school
districts
shall
be
interpreted
to
apply
to
the
board
3
of
regents.
4
Sec.
70.
Section
263.1,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
5
read
as
follows:
6
263.1
Objects
——
departments.
7
The
university
of
Iowa
shall
never
be
under
the
control
of
8
any
religious
denomination.
Its
object
shall
be
to
provide
the
9
best
and
most
efficient
means
of
imparting
to
men
and
women,
10
upon
equal
terms,
a
liberal
education
and
thorough
knowledge
of
11
the
different
branches
of
literature
and
the
arts
and
sciences,
12
with
their
varied
applications.
It
shall
include
colleges
13
of
liberal
arts,
law,
medicine,
and
such
other
colleges
and
14
departments,
with
such
courses
of
instruction
and
elective
15
studies
as
the
state
board
of
regents
may
determine
from
time
16
to
time.
If
a
practitioner
preparation
program
as
defined
in
17
section
272.1
256.100
is
established
by
the
board,
it
shall
18
include
the
subject
of
physical
education.
Instruction
in
the
19
liberal
arts
college
shall
begin,
so
far
as
practicable,
at
the
20
points
where
the
same
is
completed
in
high
schools.
21
Sec.
71.
Section
266.2,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
22
read
as
follows:
23
266.2
Courses
of
study.
24
There
shall
be
adopted
and
taught
at
said
university
of
25
science
and
technology
practical
courses
of
study,
embracing
26
in
their
leading
branches
such
as
relate
to
agriculture
and
27
mechanic
arts,
mines
and
mining,
and
ceramics,
and
such
other
28
branches
as
are
best
calculated
to
educate
thoroughly
the
29
agricultural
and
industrial
classes
in
the
several
pursuits
30
and
professions
of
life,
including
military
tactics.
If
a
31
practitioner
preparation
program
as
defined
in
section
272.1
32
256.100
is
established,
it
shall
include
the
subject
of
33
physical
education.
34
Sec.
72.
Section
272A.2,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
35
-55-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
55/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
follows:
1
272A.2
Designated
state
official.
2
The
designated
state
official
for
this
state,
within
the
3
meaning
of
section
272A.1
,
article
II
,
paragraph
“b”
,
of
the
4
interstate
agreement
on
qualification
of
educational
personnel,
5
shall
be
the
executive
director
of
the
board
of
educational
6
examiners
administrator
of
the
division
of
licensing
and
7
educator
effectiveness
of
the
department
of
education
.
The
8
executive
director
division
administrator
shall
enter
into
9
contracts
pursuant
to
section
272A.1
,
article
III
,
of
the
10
agreement
only
with
the
approval
of
the
specific
text
thereof
11
by
the
state
board
of
educational
examiners
education
.
12
Sec.
73.
Section
272A.3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
13
follows:
14
272A.3
Contracts
on
file.
15
True
copies
of
all
contracts
made
on
behalf
of
this
state
16
pursuant
to
the
interstate
agreement
on
qualification
of
17
educational
personnel
shall
be
kept
on
file
by
the
state
board
18
of
educational
examiners
education
and
in
the
office
of
the
19
secretary
of
state.
The
state
board
of
educational
examiners
20
education
shall
publish
all
such
contracts
in
convenient
form.
21
The
state
board
of
educational
examiners
education
may
adopt
22
rules
pursuant
to
this
chapter
.
23
Sec.
74.
Section
273.3,
subsections
5
and
11,
Code
24
Supplement
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
25
5.
Be
authorized,
subject
to
rules
of
the
state
board
of
26
education,
to
provide
directly
or
by
contractual
arrangement
27
with
public
or
private
agencies
for
special
education
programs
28
and
services,
media
services,
and
educational
programs
and
29
services
requested
by
the
local
boards
of
education
as
provided
30
in
this
chapter
,
including
but
not
limited
to
contracts
for
31
the
area
education
agency
to
provide
programs
or
services
to
32
the
local
school
districts
and
contracts
for
local
school
33
districts,
other
educational
agencies,
and
public
and
private
34
agencies
to
provide
programs
and
services
to
the
local
school
35
-56-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
56/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
districts
in
the
area
education
agency
in
lieu
of
the
area
1
education
agency
providing
the
services.
Contracts
may
be
made
2
with
public
or
private
agencies
located
outside
the
state
if
3
the
programs
and
services
comply
with
the
rules
of
the
state
4
board.
Rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
of
education
shall
5
be
consistent
with
rules,
adopted
by
the
board
of
educational
6
examiners,
relating
to
licensing
of
practitioners.
7
11.
Employ
personnel
to
carry
out
the
functions
of
the
8
area
education
agency
which
shall
include
the
employment
of
an
9
administrator
who
shall
possess
a
license
issued
under
chapter
10
272
256
.
The
administrator
shall
be
employed
pursuant
to
11
section
279.20
and
sections
279.23
,
279.24
,
and
279.25
.
The
12
salary
for
an
area
education
agency
administrator
shall
be
13
established
by
the
board
based
upon
the
previous
experience
and
14
education
of
the
administrator.
Section
279.13
applies
to
the
15
area
education
agency
board
and
to
all
teachers
employed
by
the
16
area
education
agency.
Sections
279.23
,
279.24
,
and
279.25
17
apply
to
the
area
education
board
and
to
all
administrators
18
employed
by
the
area
education
agency.
19
Sec.
75.
Section
279.13,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
20
subparagraph
(1),
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
21
(1)
Prior
to
entering
into
an
initial
contract
with
a
22
teacher
who
holds
a
license
other
than
an
initial
license
23
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
24
272
256
,
the
school
district
shall
initiate
a
state
criminal
25
history
record
check
of
the
applicant
through
the
division
of
26
criminal
investigation
of
the
department
of
public
safety,
27
submit
the
applicant’s
fingerprints
to
the
division
for
28
submission
to
the
federal
bureau
of
investigation
for
a
29
national
criminal
history
record
check,
and
review
the
sex
30
offender
registry
information
under
section
692A.121
available
31
to
the
general
public,
the
central
registry
for
child
abuse
32
information
established
under
section
235A.14
,
and
the
central
33
registry
for
dependent
adult
abuse
information
established
34
under
section
235B.5
for
information
regarding
the
applicant
35
-57-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
57/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
for
employment
as
a
teacher.
1
Sec.
76.
Section
279.19B,
subsection
1,
paragraph
a,
2
unnumbered
paragraph
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
3
follows:
4
The
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district
may
employ
for
5
head
coach
of
any
interscholastic
athletic
activities
or
for
6
assistant
coach
of
any
interscholastic
athletic
activity,
an
7
individual
who
possesses
a
coaching
authorization
issued
by
the
8
board
of
educational
examiners
pursuant
to
chapter
256
or
who
9
possesses
a
teaching
license
with
a
coaching
endorsement
issued
10
pursuant
to
chapter
272
256
.
However,
a
board
of
directors
of
11
a
school
district
shall
consider
applicants
with
qualifications
12
described
below,
in
the
following
order
of
priority:
13
Sec.
77.
Section
279.19B,
subsection
1,
paragraph
a,
14
subparagraph
(2),
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
15
(2)
A
qualified
individual
who
possesses
a
coaching
16
authorization
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
17
under
chapter
256
.
18
Sec.
78.
Section
279.24,
subsection
5,
paragraph
c,
Code
19
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
20
c.
Within
five
days
after
receipt
of
the
written
notice
21
that
the
school
board
has
voted
to
consider
termination
of
22
the
contract,
the
administrator
may
request
in
writing
to
23
the
secretary
of
the
school
board
that
the
notification
be
24
forwarded
to
the
state
board
of
educational
examiners
education
25
along
with
a
request
that
the
state
board
of
educational
26
examiners
submit
a
list
of
five
qualified
administrative
law
27
judges
to
the
parties.
Within
three
days
from
receipt
of
the
28
list
the
parties
shall
select
an
administrative
law
judge
29
by
alternately
removing
a
name
from
the
list
until
only
one
30
name
remains.
The
person
whose
name
remains
shall
be
the
31
administrative
law
judge.
The
parties
shall
determine
by
lot
32
which
party
shall
remove
the
first
name
from
the
list.
The
33
hearing
shall
be
held
no
sooner
than
ten
days
and
not
later
34
than
thirty
days
following
the
administrator’s
request
unless
35
-58-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
58/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
the
parties
otherwise
agree.
If
the
administrator
does
not
1
request
a
hearing,
the
school
board,
not
later
than
May
31,
may
2
determine
the
continuance
or
discontinuance
of
the
contract
3
and,
if
the
board
determines
to
continue
the
administrator’s
4
contract,
whether
to
suspend
the
administrator
with
or
without
5
pay
for
a
period
specified
by
the
board.
School
board
action
6
shall
be
by
majority
roll
call
vote
entered
on
the
minutes
of
7
the
meeting.
Notice
of
school
board
action
shall
be
personally
8
delivered
or
mailed
to
the
administrator.
9
Sec.
79.
Section
279.43,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
10
follows:
11
279.43
Reporting
inappropriate
teaching
assignments.
12
An
employee
licensed
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
13
under
chapter
256
and
holding
a
contract
as
described
in
14
section
279.13
shall
disclose
any
occurrence
of
a
teaching
15
assignment
for
which
that
employee
is
not
properly
licensed
16
to
the
school
official
responsible
for
determining
teaching
17
assignments.
Failure
of
the
employee
to
disclose
this
18
occurrence
or
failure
of
the
school
official
responsible
19
for
determining
teaching
assignments
to
make
appropriate
20
adjustments
to
the
employee’s
teaching
assignment
once
21
the
employee
discloses
the
occurrence
shall
constitute
an
22
incident
of
misconduct
as
provided
in
section
272.2
256.101
,
23
subsection
14
9
,
and
is
actionable
by
the
board.
If
the
24
school
official
fails
to
make
appropriate
adjustments
to
the
25
teaching
assignment
once
disclosure
by
the
employee
is
made,
26
the
employee
shall
report
this
occurrence
to
the
department
or
27
to
the
board
for
further
action.
28
Sec.
80.
Section
279.49,
subsection
3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
29
to
read
as
follows:
30
3.
The
person
employed
to
be
responsible
for
a
program
31
operated
or
contracted
by
a
board
that
is
not
licensed
by
the
32
department
of
human
services
shall
be
an
appropriately
licensed
33
teacher
under
chapter
272
256
or
shall
meet
other
standards
34
adopted
by
the
state
board
of
education.
35
-59-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
59/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
Sec.
81.
Section
280.17,
subsection
2,
paragraph
b,
Code
1
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
2
b.
If
the
results
of
an
investigation
of
abuse
of
a
3
student
by
a
school
employee
who
holds
a
license,
certificate,
4
authorization,
or
statement
of
professional
recognition
5
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
256
6
finds
that
the
school
employee’s
conduct
constitutes
a
crime
7
under
any
other
statute,
the
board
or
the
authorities,
as
8
appropriate,
shall
report
the
results
of
the
investigation
to
9
the
board
of
educational
examiners
pursuant
to
chapter
256
.
10
Sec.
82.
Section
282.3,
subsection
2,
paragraph
a,
Code
11
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
12
a.
A
child
under
the
age
of
six
years
on
the
fifteenth
of
13
September
of
the
current
school
year
shall
not
be
admitted
to
a
14
public
school
unless
the
board
of
directors
of
the
school
has
15
adopted
and
put
into
effect
courses
of
study
for
the
school
16
year
immediately
preceding
the
first
grade,
approved
by
the
17
department
of
education,
and
has
employed
a
practitioner
or
18
practitioners
for
this
work
with
standards
of
training
approved
19
by
the
state
board
of
educational
examiners
education
pursuant
20
to
chapter
256
.
21
Sec.
83.
Section
284.2,
subsections
1,
7,
and
11,
Code
2011,
22
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
23
1.
“Beginning
teacher”
means
an
individual
serving
under
an
24
initial
or
intern
license,
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
25
examiners
under
department
pursuant
to
chapter
272
256
,
who
26
is
assuming
a
position
as
a
teacher.
For
purposes
of
the
27
beginning
teacher
mentoring
and
induction
program
created
28
pursuant
to
section
284.5
,
“beginning
teacher”
also
includes
29
preschool
teachers
who
are
licensed
by
the
board
of
educational
30
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
and
are
employed
by
a
school
31
district
or
area
education
agency.
“Beginning
teacher”
does
32
not
include
a
teacher
whose
employment
with
a
school
district
33
or
area
education
agency
is
probationary
unless
the
teacher
is
34
serving
under
an
initial
or
teacher
intern
license
issued
by
35
-60-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
60/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
.
1
7.
“Mentor”
means
an
individual
employed
by
a
school
2
district
or
area
education
agency
as
a
teacher
or
a
retired
3
teacher
who
holds
a
valid
license
issued
under
chapter
272
256
.
4
The
individual
must
have
a
record
of
four
years
of
successful
5
teaching
practice,
must
be
employed
on
a
nonprobationary
6
basis,
and
must
demonstrate
professional
commitment
to
both
7
the
improvement
of
teaching
and
learning
and
the
development
8
of
beginning
teachers.
9
11.
“Teacher”
means
an
individual
who
holds
a
practitioner’s
10
license
issued
under
chapter
272
256
,
or
a
statement
of
11
professional
recognition
issued
under
chapter
272
256
who
is
12
employed
in
a
nonadministrative
position
by
a
school
district
13
or
area
education
agency
pursuant
to
a
contract
issued
by
a
14
board
of
directors
under
section
279.13
.
A
teacher
may
be
15
employed
in
both
an
administrative
and
a
nonadministrative
16
position
by
a
board
of
directors
and
shall
be
considered
a
17
part-time
teacher
for
the
portion
of
time
that
the
teacher
is
18
employed
in
a
nonadministrative
position.
19
Sec.
84.
Section
284.5,
subsection
6,
Code
2011,
is
amended
20
to
read
as
follows:
21
6.
Upon
completion
of
the
program,
the
beginning
teacher
22
shall
be
comprehensively
evaluated
to
determine
if
the
teacher
23
meets
expectations
to
move
to
the
career
level.
The
school
24
district
or
area
education
agency
that
employs
the
beginning
25
teacher
shall
recommend
for
a
standard
license
a
beginning
26
teacher
who
is
determined
through
a
comprehensive
evaluation
27
to
demonstrate
competence
in
the
Iowa
teaching
standards.
A
28
school
district
or
area
education
agency
may
offer
a
beginning
29
teacher
a
third
year
of
participation
in
the
program
if,
after
30
conducting
a
comprehensive
evaluation,
the
school
district
31
determines
that
the
teacher
is
likely
to
successfully
complete
32
the
mentoring
and
induction
program
by
the
end
of
the
third
33
year
of
eligibility.
A
teacher
granted
a
third
year
of
34
eligibility
shall
develop
a
teacher’s
mentoring
and
induction
35
-61-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
61/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
program
plan
in
accordance
with
this
chapter
and
shall
undergo
1
a
comprehensive
evaluation
at
the
end
of
the
third
year.
2
The
board
of
educational
examiners
department
shall
grant
a
3
one-year
extension
of
the
beginning
teacher’s
initial
license
4
upon
notification
by
the
school
district
that
the
teacher
will
5
participate
in
a
third
year
of
the
school
district’s
program.
6
Sec.
85.
Section
284.7,
subsection
1,
paragraph
a,
7
subparagraph
(1),
subparagraph
divisions
(a)
and
(b),
Code
8
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
9
(a)
Has
successfully
completed
an
approved
practitioner
10
preparation
program
as
defined
in
section
272.1
256.100
11
or
holds
an
intern
teacher
license
issued
by
the
board
of
12
educational
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
.
13
(b)
Holds
an
initial
or
intern
teacher
license
issued
by
the
14
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
256
.
15
Sec.
86.
Section
284.7,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
16
subparagraph
(1),
unnumbered
paragraph
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
17
to
read
as
follows:
18
A
career
teacher
is
a
teacher
who
holds
a
statement
of
19
professional
recognition
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
20
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
or
who
meets
the
following
21
requirements:
22
Sec.
87.
Section
284.7,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
23
subparagraph
(1),
subparagraph
division
(c),
Code
2011,
is
24
amended
to
read
as
follows:
25
(c)
Holds
a
valid
license
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
26
examiners
under
chapter
256
.
27
Sec.
88.
Section
284.7,
subsection
2,
paragraph
b,
28
subparagraph
(1),
subparagraph
division
(b),
Code
2011,
is
29
amended
to
read
as
follows:
30
(b)
Holds
a
valid
license
from
the
board
of
educational
31
examiners
issued
under
chapter
256
.
32
Sec.
89.
Section
284.7,
subsection
2,
paragraph
b,
33
subparagraph
(2),
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
34
(2)
It
is
the
intent
of
the
general
assembly
that
the
35
-62-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
62/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
participating
district
shall
establish
a
minimum
salary
for
1
an
advanced
teacher
that
is
at
least
thirteen
thousand
five
2
hundred
dollars
greater
than
the
minimum
career
teacher
3
salary.
In
conjunction
with
the
development
of
the
review
4
panel
pursuant
to
section
284.9
,
the
department
shall
make
5
recommendations
to
the
general
assembly
by
January
1,
2002,
6
regarding
the
appropriate
district-to-district
recognition
for
7
advanced
teachers
and
methods
that
facilitate
the
transition
of
8
a
teacher
to
the
advanced
level.
9
Sec.
90.
Section
284.9,
subsection
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
10
to
read
as
follows:
11
1.
A
career
II
teacher
seeking
to
receive
an
advanced
12
designation
shall
submit
a
portfolio
of
work
evidence
aligned
13
with
the
Iowa
teaching
standards
to
a
review
panel
established
14
in
accordance
with
subsection
2
.
A
majority
of
the
evidence
in
15
the
portfolio
shall
be
classroom-based.
The
review
panel
shall
16
evaluate
the
career
II
teacher’s
portfolio
to
determine
whether
17
the
teacher
demonstrates
superior
teaching
skills
and
shall
18
make
a
recommendation
to
the
board
of
educational
examiners
19
department
whether
or
not
the
teacher
shall
receive
an
advanced
20
designation.
The
standards
for
recommendation
include,
but
21
are
not
limited
to,
meeting
the
Iowa
teaching
standards
at
an
22
advanced
level.
23
Sec.
91.
Section
284.10,
subsections
2
and
4,
Code
2011,
are
24
amended
to
read
as
follows:
25
2.
An
administrator
licensed
under
chapter
272
256
who
26
conducts
evaluations
of
teachers
for
purposes
of
this
chapter
27
shall
complete
the
evaluator
training
program.
A
practitioner
28
licensed
under
chapter
272
256
who
is
not
an
administrator
29
may
enroll
in
the
evaluator
training
program.
Enrollment
30
preference
shall
be
given
to
administrators.
Upon
successful
31
completion,
the
provider
shall
certify
that
the
administrator
32
or
other
practitioner
is
qualified
to
conduct
evaluations
33
for
employment,
make
recommendations
for
licensure,
and
make
34
recommendations
that
a
teacher
is
qualified
to
advance
from
one
35
-63-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
63/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
career
path
level
to
the
next
career
path
level
pursuant
to
1
this
chapter
.
Certification
is
for
a
period
of
five
years
and
2
may
be
renewed.
3
4.
The
state
board
of
educational
examiners
shall
require
4
certification
as
a
condition
of
issuing
or
renewing
an
5
administrator’s
license
under
chapter
256
.
6
Sec.
92.
Section
284A.2,
subsections
1,
2,
and
7,
Code
2011,
7
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
8
1.
“Administrator”
means
an
individual
holding
a
9
professional
administrator
license
issued
under
chapter
10
272
256
who
is
employed
in
a
school
district
administrative
11
position
by
a
school
district
or
area
education
agency
12
pursuant
to
a
contract
issued
by
a
board
of
directors
under
13
section
279.23
and
is
engaged
in
instructional
leadership.
14
An
administrator
may
be
employed
in
both
an
administrative
15
and
a
nonadministrative
position
by
a
board
of
directors
and
16
shall
be
considered
a
part-time
administrator
for
the
portion
17
of
time
that
the
individual
is
employed
in
an
administrative
18
position.
“Administrator”
does
not
include
assistant
principals
19
or
assistant
superintendents.
20
2.
“Beginning
administrator”
means
an
individual
serving
21
under
an
administrator
license
,
issued
by
the
board
of
22
educational
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
,
who
is
assuming
a
23
position
as
a
school
district
principal
or
superintendent
for
24
the
first
time.
25
7.
“Mentor”
means
an
individual
employed
by
a
school
26
district
or
area
education
agency
as
a
school
district
27
administrator
or
a
retired
administrator
who
holds
a
valid
28
license
issued
under
chapter
272
256
.
The
individual
must
have
29
a
record
of
four
years
of
successful
administrative
experience
30
and
must
demonstrate
professional
commitment
to
both
the
31
improvement
of
teaching
and
learning
and
the
development
of
32
beginning
administrators.
33
Sec.
93.
Section
284A.5,
subsection
5,
Code
2011,
is
amended
34
to
read
as
follows:
35
-64-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
64/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
5.
By
the
end
of
a
beginning
administrator’s
first
year
of
1
employment,
the
beginning
administrator
may
be
comprehensively
2
evaluated
to
determine
if
the
administrator
meets
expectations
3
to
move
to
a
professional
administrator
license,
where
4
appropriate.
The
school
district
or
area
education
agency
that
5
employs
a
beginning
administrator
shall
recommend
the
beginning
6
administrator
for
a
professional
administrator
license,
where
7
appropriate,
if
the
beginning
administrator
is
determined
8
through
a
comprehensive
evaluation
to
demonstrate
competence
in
9
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
adopted
pursuant
10
to
section
256.7,
subsection
27
.
A
school
district
or
area
11
education
agency
may
allow
a
beginning
administrator
a
second
12
year
to
demonstrate
competence
in
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
13
administrators
if,
after
conducting
a
comprehensive
evaluation,
14
the
school
district
or
area
education
agency
determines
15
that
the
administrator
is
likely
to
successfully
demonstrate
16
competence
in
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
by
17
the
end
of
the
second
year.
Upon
notification
by
the
school
18
district
or
area
education
agency,
the
board
of
educational
19
examiners
department
shall
grant
a
beginning
administrator
20
who
has
been
allowed
a
second
year
to
demonstrate
competence
21
a
one-year
extension
of
the
beginning
administrator’s
initial
22
license.
An
administrator
granted
a
second
year
to
demonstrate
23
competence
shall
undergo
a
comprehensive
evaluation
at
the
end
24
of
the
second
year.
25
Sec.
94.
Section
284A.6,
subsection
2,
Code
2011,
is
amended
26
to
read
as
follows:
27
2.
In
cooperation
with
the
administrator’s
evaluator,
the
28
administrator
who
has
a
professional
administrator
license
29
issued
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
pursuant
to
30
chapter
272
256
and
is
employed
by
a
school
district
or
31
area
education
agency
in
a
school
district
administrative
32
position
shall
develop
an
individual
administrator
professional
33
development
plan.
The
purpose
of
the
plan
is
to
promote
34
individual
and
group
professional
development.
The
individual
35
-65-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
65/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
plan
shall
be
based,
at
a
minimum,
on
the
needs
of
the
1
administrator,
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
2
adopted
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
27
,
and
the
3
student
achievement
goals
of
the
attendance
center
and
the
4
school
district
as
outlined
in
the
comprehensive
school
5
improvement
plan.
6
Sec.
95.
Section
284A.7,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
7
follows:
8
284A.7
Evaluation
requirements
for
administrators.
9
A
school
district
shall
conduct
an
evaluation
of
an
10
administrator
who
holds
a
professional
administrator
license
11
issued
under
chapter
272
256
at
least
once
every
three
12
years
for
purposes
of
assisting
the
administrator
in
making
13
continuous
improvement,
documenting
continued
competence
in
14
the
Iowa
standards
for
school
administrators
adopted
pursuant
15
to
section
256.7,
subsection
27
,
or
to
determine
whether
the
16
administrator’s
practice
meets
school
district
expectations.
17
The
review
shall
include,
at
a
minimum,
an
assessment
of
the
18
administrator’s
competence
in
meeting
the
Iowa
standards
for
19
school
administrators
and
the
goals
of
the
administrator’s
20
individual
professional
development
plan,
including
supporting
21
documentation
or
artifacts
aligned
to
the
Iowa
standards
for
22
school
administrators
and
the
individual
administrator’s
23
professional
development
plan.
24
Sec.
96.
Section
294.3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
25
follows:
26
294.3
State
aid
and
tuition.
27
A
school
shall
not
be
deprived
of
its
right
to
be
approved
28
for
state
aid
or
approved
for
tuition
by
reason
of
the
29
employment
of
any
practitioner
as
authorized
under
section
30
272.9
256.113
.
31
Sec.
97.
Section
299A.2,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
32
to
read
as
follows:
33
299A.2
Competent
private
instruction
by
licensed
34
practitioner.
35
-66-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
66/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
If
a
licensed
practitioner
provides
competent
instruction
1
to
a
school-age
child,
the
practitioner
shall
possess
a
valid
2
license
or
certificate
which
has
been
issued
by
the
state
board
3
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
and
which
is
4
appropriate
to
the
ages
and
grade
levels
of
the
children
to
5
be
taught.
Competent
private
instruction
may
include
but
is
6
not
limited
to
a
home
school
assistance
program
which
provides
7
instruction
or
instructional
supervision
offered
through
an
8
accredited
nonpublic
school
or
public
school
district
by
a
9
teacher,
who
is
employed
by
the
accredited
nonpublic
school
or
10
public
school
district,
who
assists
and
supervises
a
parent,
11
guardian,
or
legal
custodian
in
providing
instruction
to
a
12
child.
If
competent
private
instruction
is
provided
through
13
a
public
school
district,
the
child
shall
be
enrolled
and
14
included
in
the
basic
enrollment
of
the
school
district
as
15
provided
in
section
257.6
.
Sections
299A.3
through
299A.7
16
do
not
apply
to
competent
private
instruction
provided
by
17
a
licensed
practitioner
under
this
section
.
However,
the
18
reporting
requirement
contained
in
section
299A.3,
subsection
19
1
,
shall
apply
to
competent
private
instruction
provided
by
20
licensed
practitioners
that
is
not
part
of
a
home
school
21
assistance
program
offered
through
an
accredited
nonpublic
22
school
or
public
school
district.
23
Sec.
98.
Section
321.178,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
24
subparagraph
(2),
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
25
follows:
26
(2)
(a)
To
be
qualified
to
provide
street
or
highway
27
driving
instruction,
a
person
shall
be
certified
by
the
28
department
and
authorized
by
the
board
department
of
29
educational
examiners
education
.
A
person
shall
not
be
30
required
to
hold
a
current
Iowa
teacher
or
administrator
31
license
at
the
elementary
or
secondary
level
or
to
have
32
satisfied
the
educational
requirements
for
an
Iowa
teacher
33
license
at
the
elementary
or
secondary
level
in
order
to
34
be
certified
by
the
department
or
authorized
by
the
board
35
-67-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
67/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
department
of
educational
examiners
education
to
provide
street
1
or
highway
driving
instruction.
2
(b)
The
department
shall
adopt
rules
pursuant
to
chapter
3
17A
to
provide
for
certification
of
persons
qualified
to
4
provide
street
or
highway
driving
instruction.
The
state
5
board
of
educational
examiners
education
shall
adopt
rules
6
pursuant
to
chapter
17A
to
provide
for
authorization
of
7
persons
certified
by
the
department
to
provide
street
or
8
highway
driving
instruction.
The
department
may
disqualify
a
9
person
from
providing
street
or
highway
driving
instruction
10
without
concurrent
or
further
action
by
the
board
department
11
of
educational
examiners
education
,
and
the
board
department
12
of
educational
examiners
education
may
withhold
or
withdraw
13
authorization
to
provide
street
or
highway
driving
instruction
14
without
concurrent
or
further
action
by
the
department.
15
Sec.
99.
Section
321.178,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
16
subparagraph
(3),
unnumbered
paragraph
1,
Code
Supplement
2011,
17
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
18
The
department
shall
not
disqualify
a
person
from
providing
19
street
or
highway
driving
instruction
and
neither
the
board
of
20
educational
examiners
nor
the
department
of
education
shall
not
21
withhold
or
withdraw
authorization
to
provide
street
or
highway
22
instruction
for
the
sole
reason
that
the
person
was
involved
23
in
a
motor
vehicle
accident,
unless
either
of
the
following
24
circumstances
exist:
25
Sec.
100.
Section
622.10,
subsection
8,
Code
Supplement
26
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
27
8.
A
qualified
school
guidance
counselor,
who
is
licensed
28
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
under
chapter
272
256
29
and
who
obtains
information
by
reason
of
the
counselor’s
30
employment
as
a
qualified
school
guidance
counselor,
shall
not
31
be
allowed,
in
giving
testimony,
to
disclose
any
confidential
32
communications
properly
entrusted
to
the
counselor
by
a
pupil
33
or
the
pupil’s
parent
or
guardian
in
the
counselor’s
capacity
34
as
a
qualified
school
guidance
counselor
and
necessary
and
35
-68-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
68/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
proper
to
enable
the
counselor
to
perform
the
counselor’s
1
duties
as
a
qualified
school
guidance
counselor.
2
Sec.
101.
Section
709.15,
subsection
1,
paragraph
f,
Code
3
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
4
f.
“School
employee”
means
a
practitioner
as
defined
in
5
section
272.1
256.100
.
6
Sec.
102.
REPEAL.
Section
256.16,
Code
2011,
is
repealed.
7
Sec.
103.
REPEAL.
Chapter
272,
Code
and
Code
Supplement
8
2011,
is
repealed.
9
Sec.
104.
TRANSITION
PROVISIONS.
10
1.
A
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
statement
of
11
professional
recognition
issued
prior
to
the
effective
date
of
12
this
division
of
this
Act
is
valid
until
the
expiration
date
13
established
on
the
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
14
statement
of
professional
recognition.
15
2.
Any
rule,
regulation,
form,
order,
or
directive
16
promulgated
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
as
required
17
to
administer
and
enforce
the
provisions
of
chapter
272,
Code
18
and
Code
Supplement
2011,
shall
continue
in
full
force
and
19
effect
until
amended,
repealed,
or
supplemented
by
affirmative
20
action
of
the
state
board
of
education.
21
3.
An
administrative
hearing
or
court
proceeding
arising
22
out
of
an
enforcement
action
under
chapter
272
pending
on
23
the
effective
date
of
this
division
of
this
Act
shall
not
24
be
affected
due
to
this
division
of
this
Act.
Any
cause
of
25
action
or
statute
of
limitation
relating
to
an
action
taken
by
26
the
board
of
educational
examiners
shall
not
be
affected
as
a
27
result
of
this
division
of
this
Act
and
such
cause
or
statute
28
of
limitation
shall
apply
to
the
state
board
of
education,
the
29
director
of
the
department
of
education,
and
the
department
of
30
education,
as
applicable.
31
4.
a.
All
employees
of
the
board
of
educational
examiners
32
shall
be
considered
employees
of
the
department
of
education
33
on
the
effective
date
of
this
division
of
this
Act
without
34
incurring
any
loss
in
salary,
benefits,
or
accrued
years
of
35
-69-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
69/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
service.
1
b.
If
an
employee
of
the
department
is
an
employee
covered
2
under
the
collective
bargaining
provisions
of
chapter
20,
that
3
employee
shall
also
be
covered
under
chapter
20
upon
employment
4
with
the
department
of
education.
5
c.
All
employees
of
the
board
transitioning
employment
to
6
the
department
pursuant
to
this
subsection
shall
be
considered
7
employees
for
purposes
of
chapter
97B.
8
d.
Notwithstanding
any
provisions
to
the
contrary
in
9
chapter
68B
or
in
this
division
of
this
Act,
and
subject
to
the
10
approval
of
the
director
of
the
department
of
education,
the
11
department
may
employ
not
more
than
two
individuals
who
were
12
employed
by
the
board.
13
5.
Any
replacement
of
signs,
logos,
stationery,
insignia,
14
uniforms,
and
related
items
that
is
made
due
to
the
effect
of
15
this
division
of
this
Act
shall
be
done
as
part
of
the
normal
16
replacement
cycle
for
such
items.
17
6.
The
board
of
educational
examiners
shall
assist
the
18
department
of
education
in
implementing
this
division
of
this
19
Act
by
providing
for
an
effective
transition
of
powers
and
20
duties
from
one
agency
to
another
under
chapters
256
and
272
21
and
related
administrative
rules.
To
the
extent
requested
by
22
the
department
of
education,
such
assistance
shall
include
23
but
is
not
limited
to
assisting
in
cooperating
with
federal
24
agencies
such
as
the
United
States
department
of
education.
25
7.
Any
moneys
remaining
in
any
account
or
fund
under
26
the
control
of
the
board
of
educational
examiners
on
the
27
effective
date
of
this
division
of
this
Act
and
relating
to
the
28
provisions
of
this
division
of
this
Act
shall
be
transferred
29
to
a
comparable
fund
or
account
under
the
control
of
the
30
department
of
education
for
such
purposes.
Notwithstanding
31
section
8.33,
the
moneys
transferred
in
accordance
with
this
32
subsection
shall
not
revert
to
the
account
or
fund
from
which
33
appropriated
or
transferred.
34
8.
Any
license,
permit,
or
contract
issued
or
entered
35
-70-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
70/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
into
by
the
board
of
educational
examiners
relating
to
the
1
provisions
of
this
division
of
this
Act
in
effect
on
the
2
effective
date
of
this
division
of
this
Act
shall
continue
3
in
full
force
and
effect
pending
transfer
of
such
licenses,
4
permits,
or
contracts
to
the
department
of
education.
5
9.
Federal
funds
utilized
by
the
executive
director
of
the
6
board
of
educational
examiners
prior
to
the
effective
date
of
7
this
division
of
this
Act
to
employ
personnel
necessary
for
the
8
administration
of
the
board’s
programs
shall
be
applied
to
and
9
be
available
for
the
transfer
of
such
personnel
from
the
board
10
office
to
the
department
of
education.
11
10.
The
initial
board
of
educational
examiners
created
12
within
the
department
of
education
shall
consist
of
the
members
13
of
the
board
of
educational
examiners
appointed
in
accordance
14
with
section
272.3,
Code
2011,
serving
on
the
effective
date
15
of
this
division
of
this
Act.
Said
board
members
shall
serve
16
as
members
and
fulfill
the
duties
of
the
board
of
educational
17
examiners
as
created
by
this
division
of
this
Act
until
such
18
time
as
members
of
the
board
are
appointed
as
provided
by
19
section
256.104
as
enacted
by
this
division
of
this
Act.
20
DIVISION
XI
21
SCHOOL
INSTRUCTIONAL
TIME
TASK
FORCE
22
Sec.
105.
SCHOOL
INSTRUCTIONAL
TIME
TASK
FORCE.
23
1.
The
director
of
the
department
of
education
shall
24
appoint
a
school
instructional
time
task
force
comprised
of
at
25
least
seven
members
to
conduct
a
study
regarding
the
minimum
26
requirements
of
the
school
day
and
the
school
year.
The
study
27
shall
include
but
not
be
limited
to
an
examination
of
the
28
following:
29
a.
Whether
the
minimum
length
of
an
instructional
day
should
30
be
extended
and,
if
so,
whether
the
instructional
day
should
be
31
extended
for
all
students
or
for
specific
groups
of
students.
32
b.
Whether
the
minimum
number
of
instructional
days
or
33
hours
in
a
school
year
should
be
increased
and,
if
so,
whether
34
the
minimum
number
of
days
or
hours
in
a
school
year
should
be
35
-71-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
71/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
increased
for
all
students
or
for
specific
groups
of
students.
1
c.
Whether
the
minimum
number
of
instructional
days
or
hours
2
should
be
rearranged
to
result
in
a
shorter
summer
break,
with
3
other
days
or
weeks
off
throughout
the
school
year.
4
d.
Whether
the
minimum
school
year
should
be
defined
by
a
5
number
of
days
or
by
a
number
of
instructional
hours.
6
e.
Whether
there
should
be
a
uniform,
statewide
start
date
7
for
the
school
year
that
can
only
be
waived
for
the
purpose
of
8
implementing
an
innovative
educational
program.
9
f.
Whether
resources
necessary
to
extend
the
minimum
length
10
of
an
instructional
day
or
the
minimum
length
of
a
school
year
11
are
justified
when
compared
to
competing
education
priorities.
12
2.
The
appointment
of
members
to
the
task
force
shall
13
be
made
in
a
manner
which
provides
geographical
area
14
representation
and
complies
with
sections
69.16,
69.16A,
and
15
69.16C.
16
3.
The
task
force
shall
submit
its
findings
and
17
recommendations
in
a
report
to
the
state
board
of
education,
18
the
governor,
and
the
general
assembly
by
October
15,
2012.
19
DIVISION
XII
20
ASSESSMENTS
21
Sec.
106.
Section
256.7,
subsection
21,
paragraphs
a
and
c,
22
Code
Supplement
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
23
a.
Requirements
that
all
school
districts
and
accredited
24
nonpublic
schools
develop,
implement,
and
file
with
the
25
department
a
comprehensive
school
improvement
plan
that
26
includes,
but
is
not
limited
to,
demonstrated
school,
parental,
27
and
community
involvement
in
assessing
educational
needs,
28
establishing
local
compliance
with
education
standards
29
in
statute
and
adopted
by
rule
by
the
state
board,
and
30
with
student
achievement
levels,
and,
as
applicable,
the
31
consolidation
of
federal
and
state
planning,
goal-setting,
and
32
reporting
requirements.
33
c.
A
requirement
that
all
school
districts
and
accredited
34
nonpublic
schools
annually
report
to
the
department
and
the
35
-72-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
72/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
local
community
the
district-wide
progress
made
in
attaining
1
student
achievement
goals
on
the
academic
and
other
core
2
indicators
and
the
district-wide
progress
made
in
attaining
3
locally
established
student
learning
goals.
The
Use
by
school
4
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
shall
demonstrate
5
the
use
of
multiple
statewide
assessment
measures
identified
6
and
approved
by
the
state
board
in
determining
student
7
achievement
levels.
The
school
districts
and
accredited
8
nonpublic
schools
shall
also
report
the
number
of
students
9
who
graduate;
the
number
of
students
who
drop
out
of
school;
10
the
number
of
students
who
are
tested
and
the
percentage
of
11
students
who
are
so
tested
annually;
and
the
percentage
of
12
students
who
graduated
during
the
prior
school
year
and
who
13
completed
a
core
curriculum.
The
board
shall
develop
and
14
adopt
uniform
definitions
consistent
with
the
federal
No
Child
15
Left
Behind
Act
of
2001,
Pub.
L.
No.
107-110
and
any
federal
16
regulations
adopted
pursuant
to
the
federal
Act.
The
school
17
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
may
report
on
other
18
locally
determined
factors
influencing
student
achievement.
19
The
school
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
shall
20
also
report
to
the
local
community
their
results
by
individual
21
attendance
center.
22
Sec.
107.
Section
256.7,
subsection
21,
Code
Supplement
23
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
following
new
paragraph:
24
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
d.
By
July
1,
2014,
establishment
by
the
25
department
of
an
accountability
system
designed
to
hold
school
26
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
accountable
for
27
student
achievement.
The
accountability
system
shall,
at
28
a
minimum,
define
and
measure
student
achievement,
student
29
growth,
student
achievement
gaps,
college
and
career
readiness,
30
student
well-being,
parent
satisfaction,
school
staff
working
31
conditions,
school
fiscal
responsibility,
and
graduation
32
and
attendance
rates.
The
director
may
at
the
director’s
33
discretion,
or
shall
as
directed
by
the
state
board,
convene
34
a
working
group
to
develop
recommendations
for
any
of
the
35
-73-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
73/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
following:
1
(1)
The
accountability
system
established
pursuant
to
this
2
paragraph.
3
(2)
Redesigning
the
accreditation
procedures
implemented
4
under
section
256.11.
5
(3)
A
compliance
monitoring
process
aligned
with
the
6
accountability
system.
7
(4)
Targeting
support
for
school
districts
identified
as
8
needing
assistance
under
the
accountability
system.
9
(5)
Identifying,
studying,
and
commending
high-performing
10
districts.
11
(6)
Developing
strategies
to
take
over
the
operation
of
12
school
districts
determined
pursuant
to
section
256.11,
or
13
under
the
accountability
system,
as
persistently
failing
to
14
meet
educational
system
or
student
achievement
standards.
15
Sec.
108.
Section
256.7,
subsection
26,
paragraph
a,
16
subparagraph
(1),
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
17
follows:
18
(1)
The
rules
establishing
high
school
graduation
19
requirements
shall
authorize
a
school
district
or
20
accredited
nonpublic
school
to
consider
that
any
student
21
who
satisfactorily
completes
a
high
school-level
unit
of
22
English
or
language
arts,
mathematics,
science,
or
social
23
studies
has
satisfactorily
completed
a
unit
of
the
high
24
school
graduation
requirements
for
that
area
as
specified
25
in
this
lettered
paragraph,
and
shall
authorize
the
school
26
district
or
accredited
nonpublic
school
to
issue
high
school
27
credit
for
the
unit
to
the
student.
The
rules
shall
also
28
require
administration
of
the
college
entrance
examination
in
29
accordance
with
section
280.18.
30
Sec.
109.
Section
256.7,
subsection
26,
Code
Supplement
31
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
following
new
paragraph:
32
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
d.
Adopt
by
rule
by
July
1,
2014,
a
policy
33
for
the
incorporation
by
school
districts
of
end-of-course
34
assessments
into
the
district’s
high
school
graduation
35
-74-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
74/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
requirements.
1
Sec.
110.
Section
256.7,
subsection
28,
Code
Supplement
2
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
3
28.
Adopt
a
set
of
core
content
standards
applicable
to
4
all
students
in
kindergarten
through
grade
twelve
in
every
5
school
district
and
accredited
nonpublic
school.
For
purposes
6
of
this
subsection
,
“core
content
standards”
includes
reading,
7
mathematics,
and
science.
The
core
content
standards
shall
be
8
identical
to
the
core
content
standards
included
include
those
9
established
in
Iowa’s
approved
2006
standards
and
assessment
10
system
under
Tit.
I
of
the
federal
Elementary
and
Secondary
11
Education
Act
of
1965,
20
U.S.C.
§
6301
et
seq.,
as
amended
12
by
the
federal
No
Child
Left
Behind
Act
of
2001,
Pub.
L.
No.
13
107-110.
School
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
14
shall
include,
at
a
minimum,
the
core
content
standards
adopted
15
pursuant
to
this
subsection
in
any
set
of
locally
developed
16
content
standards.
School
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
17
schools
are
strongly
encouraged
to
set
higher
expectations
18
in
local
standards.
As
changes
in
federal
law
or
regulation
19
occur,
the
state
board
is
authorized
to
amend
the
core
content
20
standards
as
appropriate.
21
Sec.
111.
Section
256.9,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
22
adding
the
following
new
subsections:
23
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
67.
Require,
every
three
years,
a
random
24
sampling
of
students
who
are
of
the
appropriate
age
and
who
25
are
enrolled
in
school
districts
and
schools
throughout
the
26
state
to
take
the
organisation
for
economic
co-operation
and
27
development
programme
for
international
student
assessment.
28
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
68.
Develop,
by
July
1,
2014,
high
school
29
end-of-course
assessments
for
subject
areas
included
under
the
30
core
content
standards.
31
Sec.
112.
NEW
SECTION
.
256.24
Value-added
assessment
32
system.
33
1.
For
purposes
of
this
section,
unless
the
context
34
otherwise
requires,
“value-added
assessment”
means
a
method
35
-75-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
75/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
to
measure
gains
in
student
achievement
by
conducting
a
1
statistical
analysis
of
achievement
data
that
reveals
academic
2
growth
over
time
for
students
and
groups
of
students,
such
as
3
those
in
a
grade
level
or
in
a
school.
4
2.
A
value-added
assessment
system
shall
be
established
and
5
implemented
by
the
department
not
later
than
January
31,
2013,
6
to
provide
for
multivariate
longitudinal
analysis
of
annual
7
student
test
scores
to
determine
the
influence
of
a
school
8
district’s
educational
program
on
student
academic
growth
and
9
to
guide
school
district
improvement
efforts.
The
department
10
shall
select
a
value-added
assessment
system
provider
through
a
11
request
for
proposals
process.
The
system
provider
selected
12
by
the
department
shall
offer
a
value-added
assessment
system
13
to
calculate
annually
the
academic
growth
of
students,
as
14
determined
by
the
director,
and
tested
in
accordance
with
this
15
section.
The
system
provider
shall,
at
a
minimum,
meet
all
of
16
the
following
criteria:
17
a.
Use
a
mixed-model
statistical
analysis
that
has
the
18
ability
to
use
all
achievement
test
data
for
each
student,
19
including
the
data
for
students
with
missing
test
scores,
that
20
does
not
adjust
downward
expectations
for
student
progress
21
based
on
race,
poverty,
or
gender,
and
that
will
provide
the
22
best
linear
unbiased
predictions
of
school
or
other
educational
23
entity
effects
to
minimize
the
impact
of
random
errors.
24
b.
Have
the
ability
to
work
with
test
data
from
a
variety
of
25
sources,
including
data
that
are
not
vertically
scaled,
and
to
26
provide
support
for
school
districts
utilizing
the
system.
27
c.
Have
the
capacity
to
receive
and
report
results
28
electronically
and
provide
support
for
districts
utilizing
the
29
system.
30
3.
The
system
provider
shall
create
a
mechanism
to
collect
31
and
evaluate
data
in
a
manner
that
reliably
aligns
the
32
performance
of
the
teacher
with
the
achievement
levels
of
and
33
progress
of
the
teacher’s
students.
School
districts
shall
34
report
teacher-to-student
alignment
data
to
the
system
provider
35
-76-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
76/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
as
directed
by
the
department.
1
4.
The
system
provider
shall
provide
analysis
to
school
2
districts
and
to
the
department
of
education.
The
analysis
3
shall
include
but
not
be
limited
to
attendance-center-level
4
test
results
for
an
assessment
aligned
with
the
core
content
5
standards
in
the
areas
of
reading
and
mathematics
and
other
6
core
academic
areas
when
possible.
The
analysis
shall
also
7
include
but
not
be
limited
to
the
number
of
students
tested,
8
the
number
of
test
results
used
to
compute
the
averages,
9
the
average
standard
score,
and
the
corresponding
grade
10
equivalent-score,
as
well
as
measures
of
student
progress.
The
11
system
provider
shall
create
a
chart
for
each
school
district.
12
5.
A
school
district
shall
have
complete
access
to
and
13
full
utilization
of
its
own
value-added
assessment
reports
and
14
charts
generated
by
the
system
provider
at
the
student
level
15
for
the
purpose
of
measuring
student
achievement
at
different
16
educational
entity
levels.
17
6.
Where
student
outcomes
measures
are
available,
for
18
tested
subjects
and
grades,
student
outcomes
measures
19
shall
be
considered
by
the
district
to
validate
a
teacher’s
20
observational
evaluation.
Student
outcomes
measures
which
are
21
a
component
of
a
teacher’s
evaluation
are
not
public
records
22
for
the
purposes
of
chapter
22.
23
7.
Information
about
student
academic
growth
shall
be
24
used
by
the
school
district,
including
school
board
members,
25
administration,
and
staff,
for
defining
student
and
district
26
learning
goals
and
professional
development
related
to
student
27
learning
goals
across
the
school
district.
A
school
district
28
shall
submit
its
academic
growth
measures
in
the
annual
report
29
submitted
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
21,
and
may
30
reference
in
the
report
state
level
norms
for
purposes
of
31
demonstrating
school
district
performance.
32
8.
The
department
shall
use
student
academic
growth
data
to
33
determine
school
improvement
and
technical
assistance
needs
of
34
school
districts,
and
to
identify
school
districts
achieving
35
-77-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
77/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
exceptional
gains.
Beginning
January
15,
2013,
and
by
January
1
15
of
each
succeeding
year,
the
department
shall
submit
an
2
annual
progress
report
regarding
the
use
of
student
academic
3
growth
information
in
the
school
improvement
processes
to
the
4
general
assembly
and
shall
publish
the
progress
report
on
its
5
internet
site.
6
9.
A
school
district
shall
use
the
value-added
assessment
7
system
established
by
the
department
pursuant
to
subsection
1
8
not
later
than
the
school
year
beginning
July
1,
2013.
9
Sec.
113.
Section
279.60,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
10
follows:
11
279.60
Kindergarten
assessment
Assessments
——
access
to
data
12
——
reports.
13
1.
a.
Each
school
district
shall
administer
a
kindergarten
14
readiness
assessment
prescribed
by
the
department
of
education
15
to
every
resident
prekindergarten
or
four-year-old
child
whose
16
parent
or
guardian
enrolls
the
child
in
the
district.
17
b.
Each
school
district
shall
administer
the
dynamic
18
indicators
of
basic
early
literacy
skills
kindergarten
19
benchmark
assessment
or
other
kindergarten
benchmark
assessment
20
adopted
by
the
department
of
education
in
consultation
with
21
the
early
childhood
Iowa
state
board
to
every
kindergarten
22
student
enrolled
in
the
district
not
later
than
the
date
23
specified
in
section
257.6,
subsection
1
.
The
school
district
24
shall
also
collect
information
from
each
parent,
guardian,
25
or
legal
custodian
of
a
kindergarten
student
enrolled
in
the
26
district,
including
but
not
limited
to
whether
the
student
27
attended
preschool,
factors
identified
by
the
early
childhood
28
Iowa
office
pursuant
to
section
256I.5
,
and
other
demographic
29
factors.
Each
school
district
shall
report
the
results
of
30
the
assessment
and
the
preschool
information
collected
to
31
the
department
of
education
in
the
manner
prescribed
by
the
32
department
not
later
than
January
1
of
that
school
year.
The
33
early
childhood
Iowa
office
in
the
department
of
management
34
shall
have
access
to
the
raw
data.
The
department
shall
review
35
-78-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
78/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
the
information
submitted
pursuant
to
this
section
and
shall
1
submit
its
findings
and
recommendations
annually
in
a
report
to
2
the
governor,
the
general
assembly,
the
early
childhood
Iowa
3
state
board,
and
the
early
childhood
Iowa
area
boards.
4
2.
a.
Each
school
district
shall
administer
the
Iowa
5
assessments
created
by
the
state
university
of
Iowa,
to
all
6
students
enrolled
in
grade
ten
in
the
school
years
beginning
7
July
1,
2012,
and
July
1,
2013.
8
b.
This
subsection
is
repealed
July
1,
2014.
9
3.
By
July
1,
2014,
each
school
district
shall
administer
10
end-of-course
assessments
developed
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
11
subsection
68,
as
an
integral
component
of
each
course
of
study
12
under
the
core
content
standards.
13
Sec.
114.
NEW
SECTION
.
280.18
Assessment
requirements.
14
1.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district
and
the
15
authorities
in
charge
of
a
nonpublic
school
shall
provide
16
to
each
student
enrolled
in
grade
eleven
a
college
entrance
17
examination
produced
to
assess
English,
reading,
mathematics,
18
and
science.
Each
school
district
and
nonpublic
school
shall
19
offer
to
provide
to
any
student
enrolled
in
grade
eleven
20
assessments
to
assess
reading
for
information,
locating
21
information,
and
applied
mathematics.
22
2.
a.
If
funds
are
made
available
to
the
department
of
23
education
for
such
purpose,
the
cost
of
the
college
entrance
24
examination
administered
pursuant
to
subsection
1
shall
be
paid
25
by
the
department.
26
b.
The
cost
of
the
career
readiness
assessments
administered
27
pursuant
to
subsection
1
shall
be
paid
by
the
department
if
28
funds
are
available
to
the
department
for
that
purpose.
29
c.
The
costs
of
a
college
entrance
examination
taken
by
a
30
student
in
addition
to
those
specified
in
subsection
1
shall
be
31
the
responsibility
of
the
student.
32
3.
If
funds
are
available
to
the
department
for
such
33
purpose,
the
department
shall
make
a
preparation
program
for
34
the
college
entrance
examination
available
to
all
students
in
35
-79-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
79/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
grade
eleven.
The
department
may
contract
for
the
necessary
1
assessment
services.
2
4.
a.
The
school
district
or
school
shall
counsel
a
student
3
whose
scores
on
the
college
entrance
examination
administered
4
in
grade
eleven
indicate
a
high
degree
of
readiness
for
college
5
to
enroll
in
accelerated
courses,
with
an
emphasis
on
advanced
6
placement
and
other
college-level
classes.
7
b.
The
school
district
or
school
shall
provide
intervention
8
strategies
for
accelerated
learning
in
the
following
9
circumstances:
10
(1)
To
a
student
whose
scores
on
the
career
readiness
11
assessments
indicate
that
additional
assistance
is
required
12
in
reading
for
information,
locating
information,
or
applied
13
mathematics.
14
(2)
To
a
student
whose
scores
on
the
college
entrance
15
examination
administered
in
grade
eleven
indicate
that
16
additional
assistance
is
required
in
English,
reading,
17
mathematics,
and
science.
18
5.
Accommodations
provided
by
the
college
entrance
19
examination
provider
to
a
student
with
a
disability
taking
20
the
college
entrance
examination
under
subsection
1
shall
be
21
provided
in
the
following
manner:
22
a.
In
the
manner
allowed
by
the
college
entrance
examination
23
provider,
when
results
in
test
scores
are
reportable
to
24
a
postsecondary
institution
for
admissions
and
placement
25
purposes,
except
as
provided
in
paragraph
“b”
.
26
b.
In
a
manner
allowed
by
an
individualized
education
27
program
developed
for
the
student
if
the
student
is
a
student
28
requiring
special
education
under
chapter
256B
and
the
29
student’s
disability
precludes
valid
assessment
of
academic
30
ability
using
the
accommodations
provided
under
paragraph
“a”
31
when
the
student’s
scores
are
not
reportable
to
a
postsecondary
32
institution
for
admissions
and
placement
purposes.
33
6.
A
student’s
scores
on
the
examinations
administered
34
under
subsection
1
shall
be
recorded
by
the
school
district
or
35
-80-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
80/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
school
in
the
student’s
official
education
record.
1
DIVISION
XIII
2
NATIONAL
BOARD
FOR
PROFESSIONAL
TEACHING
STANDARDS
AWARDS
3
Sec.
115.
Section
256.44,
subsection
1,
paragraph
a,
Code
4
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
5
a.
If
a
teacher
registers
for
national
board
for
6
professional
teaching
standards
certification
by
after
December
7
31,
2007,
a
one-time
initial
reimbursement
award
in
the
amount
8
of
up
to
one-half
of
the
registration
fee
paid
by
the
teacher
9
for
registration
for
certification
by
the
national
board
for
10
professional
teaching
standards.
The
teacher
shall
apply
to
11
the
department
within
one
year
of
registration
in
a
manner
and
12
according
to
procedures
required
by
the
department
,
submitting
13
to
the
department
any
documentation
the
department
requires.
14
A
teacher
who
receives
an
initial
reimbursement
award
shall
15
receive
a
one-time
final
registration
award
in
the
amount
of
16
the
remaining
national
board
registration
fee
paid
by
the
17
teacher
if
the
teacher
notifies
the
department
of
the
teacher’s
18
certification
achievement
and
submits
any
documentation
19
requested
by
the
department.
20
Sec.
116.
Section
256.44,
subsection
1,
paragraph
b,
21
subparagraph
(1),
subparagraph
division
(b),
Code
2011,
is
22
amended
to
read
as
follows:
23
(b)
If
the
teacher
registers
for
national
board
for
24
professional
teaching
standards
certification
between
January
25
1,
1999,
and
December
31,
2007,
and
achieves
certification
26
within
the
timelines
and
policies
established
by
the
national
27
board
for
professional
teaching
standards,
an
annual
award
in
28
the
amount
of
two
thousand
five
hundred
dollars
upon
achieving
29
certification
by
the
national
board
of
professional
teaching
30
standards.
31
DIVISION
XIV
32
EDUCATOR
EMPLOYMENT
AND
PROFESSIONAL
DEVELOPMENT
MATTERS
33
Sec.
117.
Section
256.7,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
34
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
35
-81-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
81/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
32.
Adopt
rules
providing
for
the
1
establishment
of
a
statewide
plan
for
professional
development
2
for
practitioners
employed
in
Iowa’s
school
districts.
The
3
statewide
plan
shall
be
designed
to
make
every
reasonable
4
effort
to
utilize
best
practices,
current
technologies,
and
5
social
media,
and
shall
be
implemented
by
the
area
education
6
agencies
pursuant
to
section
273.2.
7
Sec.
118.
Section
256.9,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
8
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
9
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
69.
Approve,
amend
and
approve,
or
10
reject
each
professional
development
plan
submitted
pursuant
11
to
section
273.2,
in
accordance
with
the
rules
adopted
12
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
32,
providing
for
the
13
establishment
of
a
statewide
professional
development
plan
14
for
practitioners.
The
director
may
grant
a
waiver
to
a
15
school
district
exempting
the
school
district
from
utilizing
16
the
area
professional
development
plan
approved
pursuant
to
17
this
subsection
if
the
director
determines
that
the
school
18
district’s
professional
development
plan
achieves
the
goals
for
19
professional
development
established
in
accordance
with
section
20
256.7,
subsection
32.
21
Sec.
119.
Section
257.10,
subsection
10,
paragraph
d,
Code
22
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
23
d.
The
use
of
the
funds
calculated
under
this
subsection
24
shall
comply
with
the
requirements
of
section
256.7,
subsection
25
32,
and
chapter
284
.
26
Sec.
120.
Section
257.10,
subsection
10,
Code
2011,
is
27
amended
by
adding
the
following
new
paragraph:
28
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
e.
For
the
budget
year
beginning
July
1,
29
2012,
and
succeeding
budget
years,
the
department
of
management
30
shall
reduce
the
distributions
from
the
amount
generated
by
the
31
total
professional
development
supplement
district
cost
to
each
32
school
district
for
the
budget
year
by
ten
percent.
However,
33
for
purposes
of
the
calculation
of
the
combined
district
cost
34
pursuant
to
section
257.10,
subsection
8,
and
the
calculation
35
-82-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
82/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
the
additional
property
tax
pursuant
to
section
257.4,
the
1
total
professional
development
supplement
district
cost
is
the
2
amount
which
results
after
the
reduction
made
pursuant
to
this
3
paragraph.
4
Sec.
121.
Section
257.16,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
5
the
following
new
subsection:
6
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
5.
There
is
appropriated
to
the
department
7
of
education
for
the
fiscal
year
beginning
July
1,
2012,
and
8
each
fiscal
year
thereafter,
an
amount
equal
to
the
amount
of
9
the
professional
development
supplement
reduction,
determined
10
pursuant
to
section
257.10,
subsection
10,
paragraph
“e”
,
and
11
section
257.37A,
subsection
2,
paragraph
“d”
,
for
purposes
12
of
implementing
a
statewide
professional
development
plan
in
13
accordance
with
section
256.7,
subsection
32.
14
Sec.
122.
Section
257.37A,
subsection
2,
paragraph
d,
Code
15
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
16
d.
The
use
of
the
funds
calculated
under
this
subsection
17
shall
comply
with
requirements
of
section
256.7,
subsection
32,
18
and
chapter
284
.
19
Sec.
123.
Section
257.37A,
subsection
2,
Code
2011,
is
20
amended
by
adding
the
following
new
paragraph:
21
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
e.
For
the
budget
year
beginning
July
1,
22
2012,
and
succeeding
budget
years,
the
department
of
management
23
shall
reduce
the
distributions
from
the
amount
generated
by
the
24
total
area
education
agency
professional
development
supplement
25
district
cost
to
each
area
education
agency
for
the
budget
26
year
by
ten
percent.
However,
for
purposes
of
the
calculation
27
of
the
combined
district
cost
pursuant
to
section
257.10,
28
subsection
8,
and
the
calculation
of
the
additional
property
29
tax
pursuant
to
section
257.4,
the
total
area
educational
30
agency
professional
development
supplement
district
cost
is
the
31
amount
which
results
after
the
reduction
made
pursuant
to
this
32
paragraph.
33
Sec.
124.
Section
260C.39,
subsection
3,
Code
2011,
is
34
amended
to
read
as
follows:
35
-83-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
83/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
3.
The
terms
of
employment
of
personnel,
for
the
academic
1
year
following
the
effective
date
of
the
agreement
to
combine
2
the
merged
areas
shall
not
be
affected
by
the
combination
of
3
the
merged
areas,
except
in
accordance
with
the
procedures
4
under
sections
279.15
to
279.18
279.17
and
section
279.24
,
5
to
the
extent
those
procedures
are
applicable,
or
under
the
6
terms
of
the
base
bargaining
agreement.
The
authority
and
7
responsibility
to
offer
new
contracts
or
to
continue,
modify,
8
or
terminate
existing
contracts
pursuant
to
any
applicable
9
procedures
under
chapter
279
,
shall
be
transferred
to
the
10
acting,
and
then
to
the
new,
board
of
the
combined
merged
area
11
upon
certification
of
a
favorable
vote
to
each
of
the
merged
12
areas
affected
by
the
agreement.
The
collective
bargaining
13
agreement
of
the
merged
area
receiving
the
greatest
amount
of
14
general
state
aid
shall
serve
as
the
base
agreement
for
the
15
combined
merged
area
and
the
employees
of
the
merged
areas
16
which
combined
to
form
the
new
combined
merged
area
shall
17
automatically
be
accreted
to
the
bargaining
unit
from
that
18
former
merged
area
for
purposes
of
negotiating
the
contracts
19
for
the
following
years
without
further
action
by
the
public
20
employment
relations
board.
If
only
one
collective
bargaining
21
agreement
is
in
effect
among
the
merged
areas
which
are
22
combining
under
this
section
,
then
that
agreement
shall
serve
23
as
the
base
agreement,
and
the
employees
of
the
merged
areas
24
which
are
combining
to
form
the
new
combined
merged
area
shall
25
automatically
be
accreted
to
the
bargaining
unit
of
that
former
26
merged
area
for
purposes
of
negotiating
the
contracts
for
the
27
following
years
without
further
action
by
the
public
employment
28
relations
board.
The
board
of
the
combined
merged
area,
using
29
the
base
agreement
as
its
existing
contract,
shall
bargain
with
30
the
combined
employees
of
the
merged
areas
that
have
agreed
31
to
combine
for
the
academic
year
beginning
with
the
effective
32
date
of
the
agreement
to
combine
merged
areas.
The
bargaining
33
shall
be
completed
by
March
15
prior
to
the
academic
year
in
34
which
the
agreement
to
combine
merged
areas
becomes
effective
35
-84-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
84/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
or
within
one
hundred
eighty
days
after
the
organization
of
1
the
acting
board
of
the
new
combined
merged
area,
whichever
2
is
later.
If
a
bargaining
agreement
was
already
concluded
in
3
the
former
merged
area
which
has
the
collective
bargaining
4
agreement
that
is
serving
as
the
base
agreement
for
the
new
5
combined
merged
area,
between
the
former
merged
area
board
6
and
the
employees
of
the
former
merged
area,
that
agreement
7
is
void,
unless
the
agreement
contained
multiyear
provisions
8
affecting
academic
years
subsequent
to
the
effective
date
of
9
the
agreement
to
form
a
combined
merged
area.
If
the
base
10
collective
bargaining
agreement
contains
multiyear
provisions,
11
the
duration
and
effect
of
the
agreement
shall
be
controlled
12
by
the
terms
of
the
agreement.
The
provisions
of
the
base
13
agreement
shall
apply
to
the
offering
of
new
contracts,
or
14
the
continuation,
modification,
or
termination
of
existing
15
contracts
between
the
acting
or
new
board
of
the
combined
16
merged
area
and
the
combined
employees
of
the
new
combined
17
merged
area.
18
Sec.
125.
Section
261.48,
subsection
1,
paragraph
a,
Code
19
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
20
a.
Is
a
teacher
employed
on
a
full-time
basis
under
sections
21
279.13
through
279.17
and
279.19
in
a
school
district
in
this
22
state,
is
a
teacher
in
an
approved
nonpublic
school
in
this
23
state,
or
is
a
licensed
teacher
at
the
Iowa
braille
and
sight
24
saving
school
or
the
Iowa
school
for
the
deaf.
25
Sec.
126.
Section
262.9,
subsection
2,
Code
Supplement
26
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
27
2.
Elect
a
president
of
each
of
the
institutions
of
higher
28
learning;
a
superintendent
of
each
of
the
other
institutions;
29
a
treasurer
and
a
secretarial
officer
for
each
institution
30
annually;
professors,
instructors,
officers,
and
employees;
31
and
fix
their
compensation.
Sections
279.12
through
279.17,
32
279.19
,
and
section
279.27
apply
to
employees
of
the
Iowa
33
braille
and
sight
saving
school
and
the
state
school
for
34
the
deaf,
who
are
licensed
pursuant
to
chapter
272
256
.
In
35
-85-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
85/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
following
those
sections
in
chapter
279
,
the
references
to
1
boards
of
directors
of
school
districts
shall
be
interpreted
to
2
apply
to
the
board
of
regents.
3
Sec.
127.
Section
272.15,
subsection
1,
paragraph
a,
Code
4
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
5
a.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district
or
area
6
education
agency,
the
superintendent
of
a
school
district
or
7
the
chief
administrator
of
an
area
education
agency,
and
the
8
authorities
in
charge
of
a
nonpublic
school
shall
report
to
the
9
board
the
nonrenewal
or
termination,
for
reasons
of
alleged
10
or
actual
misconduct,
of
a
person’s
contract
executed
under
11
sections
279.12
,
279.13
,
279.15
,
279.16,
279.17,
279.19
through
12
279.21
,
279.23
,
and
279.24
,
and
the
resignation
of
a
person
who
13
holds
a
license,
certificate,
or
authorization
issued
by
the
14
board
as
a
result
of
or
following
an
incident
or
allegation
15
of
misconduct
that,
if
proven,
would
constitute
a
violation
16
of
the
rules
adopted
by
the
board
to
implement
section
272.2,
17
subsection
14
,
paragraph
“b”
,
subparagraph
(1),
when
the
18
board
or
reporting
official
has
a
good
faith
belief
that
the
19
incident
occurred
or
the
allegation
is
true.
The
board
may
20
deny
a
license
or
revoke
the
license
of
an
administrator
if
21
the
board
finds
by
a
preponderance
of
the
evidence
that
the
22
administrator
failed
to
report
the
termination
or
resignation
23
of
a
school
employee
holding
a
license,
certificate,
statement
24
of
professional
recognition,
or
coaching
authorization,
for
25
reasons
of
alleged
or
actual
misconduct,
as
defined
by
this
26
section
.
27
Sec.
128.
Section
273.2,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
28
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
29
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
10.
The
area
education
agency
boards
shall
30
each
annually
submit
to
the
department
of
education
a
plan
31
for
a
professional
development
program,
to
be
implemented
in
32
the
following
fiscal
year,
which
combines
the
professional
33
development
priorities
of
the
state
board
of
education,
34
in
accordance
with
section
256.7,
subsection
32,
with
the
35
-86-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
86/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
professional
development
needs
of
the
schools
and
school
1
districts
in
the
area.
The
area
education
agency
board
shall
2
provide
professional
development
services
under
the
approved
3
program
to
local
school
districts
in
the
area.
4
Sec.
129.
Section
273.22,
subsection
1,
Code
2011,
is
5
amended
to
read
as
follows:
6
1.
The
terms
of
employment
of
the
administrator
and
staff
7
of
affected
area
education
agencies
for
the
school
year
8
beginning
with
the
effective
date
of
the
formation
of
the
new
9
area
education
agency
shall
not
be
affected
by
the
formation
10
of
the
new
area
education
agency,
except
in
accordance
with
11
the
provisions
of
sections
279.15
through
279.18
279.17
,
12
and
279.24
,
and
the
authority
and
responsibility
to
offer
13
new
contracts
or
to
continue,
modify,
or
terminate
existing
14
contracts
pursuant
to
sections
279.12
,
279.13
,
279.15
,
15
279.16,
279.17,
279.19
through
279.21
,
279.23
,
and
279.24
16
for
the
school
year
beginning
with
the
effective
date
of
the
17
reorganization
shall
be
transferred
from
the
boards
of
the
18
existing
area
education
agencies
to
the
board
of
the
new
area
19
education
agency
following
approval
of
the
reorganization
plan
20
by
the
state
board
as
provided
in
section
273.21,
subsection
4
.
21
Sec.
130.
Section
275.33,
subsection
1,
Code
2011,
is
22
amended
to
read
as
follows:
23
1.
The
terms
of
employment
of
superintendents,
principals,
24
and
teachers,
for
the
school
year
following
the
effective
date
25
of
the
formation
of
the
new
district
shall
not
be
affected
by
26
the
formation
of
the
new
district,
except
in
accordance
with
27
the
provisions
of
sections
279.15
to
279.18
279.17
and
279.24
28
and
the
authority
and
responsibility
to
offer
new
contracts
or
29
to
continue,
modify,
or
terminate
existing
contracts
pursuant
30
to
sections
279.12
,
279.13
,
279.15
,
279.16,
279.17,
279.19
to
31
279.21
,
279.23
,
and
279.24
for
the
school
year
beginning
with
32
the
effective
date
of
the
reorganization
shall
be
transferred
33
from
the
boards
of
the
existing
districts
to
the
board
of
the
34
new
district
on
the
third
Tuesday
of
January
prior
to
the
35
-87-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
87/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
school
year
the
reorganization
is
effective.
1
Sec.
131.
Section
279.13,
subsection
5,
Code
2011,
is
2
amended
to
read
as
follows:
3
5.
Notwithstanding
the
other
provisions
of
this
section
,
a
4
temporary
contract
may
be
issued
to
a
teacher
to
fill
a
vacancy
5
created
by
a
leave
of
absence
in
accordance
with
the
provisions
6
of
section
29A.28
,
which
contract
shall
automatically
terminate
7
upon
return
from
military
leave
of
the
former
incumbent
of
the
8
teaching
position
and
which
contract
shall
not
be
subject
to
9
the
provisions
of
sections
279.15
through
279.17,
279.19
,
or
10
section
and
279.27
.
A
separate
extracurricular
contract
issued
11
pursuant
to
section
279.19A
to
a
person
issued
a
temporary
12
contract
under
this
section
shall
automatically
terminate
with
13
the
termination
of
the
temporary
contract
as
required
under
14
section
279.19A,
subsection
8
.
15
Sec.
132.
Section
279.13,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
16
the
following
new
subsection:
17
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
6.
Notwithstanding
the
other
provisions
18
of
this
section
and
any
contrary
provision
of
the
Code,
if
19
the
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district
or
charter
school
20
institutes,
by
majority
vote
of
the
membership
of
the
board,
21
a
reduction
in
force,
a
decision
by
the
board
not
to
renew
a
22
teacher
contract
shall
be
based
upon
the
following:
23
a.
The
teacher’s
effectiveness
as
demonstrated
in
24
evaluations
conducted
under
the
teacher
evaluation
plan
adopted
25
pursuant
to
section
284.4,
and
the
teacher’s
performance
review
26
conducted
pursuant
to
section
284.8.
27
b.
The
teacher’s
licensure
and
endorsements
and
the
needs
of
28
the
school
district
or
school,
and
the
needs
of
the
students.
29
c.
The
teacher’s
hiring
date
may
be
taken
into
consideration
30
only
if
the
bases
existing
under
paragraphs
“a”
and
“b”
are
31
substantially
equal
to
the
bases
existing
under
paragraphs
“a”
32
and
“b”
for
another
teacher.
33
Sec.
133.
Section
279.16,
subsection
4,
Code
2011,
is
34
amended
to
read
as
follows:
35
-88-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
88/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
4.
The
board
shall
not
be
bound
by
common
law
or
statutory
1
rules
of
evidence
or
by
technical
or
formal
rules
of
procedure,
2
but
it
shall
hold
the
hearing
in
such
manner
as
is
best
suited
3
to
ascertain
and
conserve
the
substantial
rights
of
the
4
parties.
Process
and
procedure
under
sections
279.13
to
279.17
5
and
279.19
shall
be
as
summary
as
reasonably
may
be.
6
Sec.
134.
Section
279.17,
subsections
1,
5,
and
7,
Code
7
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
8
1.
If
the
teacher
is
no
longer
a
probationary
teacher,
the
9
teacher
may,
within
ten
five
days,
appeal
the
determination
of
10
the
board
to
an
adjudicator
by
filing
a
notice
of
appeal
with
11
the
secretary
of
the
board.
The
notice
of
appeal
shall
contain
12
a
concise
statement
of
the
action
which
is
the
subject
of
the
13
appeal,
the
particular
board
action
appealed
from,
the
grounds
14
on
which
relief
is
sought
and
the
relief
sought.
15
5.
Before
the
date
set
for
hearing
a
petition
for
review
16
of
board
action,
which
shall
be
within
ten
five
days
after
17
receipt
of
the
record
unless
otherwise
agreed
or
unless
the
18
adjudicator
orders
additional
evidence
be
taken
before
the
19
board,
application
may
be
made
to
the
adjudicator
for
leave
to
20
present
evidence
in
addition
to
that
found
in
the
record
of
the
21
case.
If
it
is
shown
to
the
adjudicator
that
the
additional
22
evidence
is
material
and
that
there
were
good
reasons
for
23
failure
to
present
it
in
the
private
hearing
before
the
board,
24
the
adjudicator
may
order
that
the
additional
evidence
be
taken
25
before
the
board
upon
conditions
determined
by
the
adjudicator.
26
The
board
may
modify
its
findings
and
decision
in
the
case
by
27
reason
of
the
additional
evidence
and
shall
file
that
evidence
28
and
any
modifications,
new
findings,
or
decisions,
with
the
29
adjudicator
and
mail
copies
of
the
new
findings
or
decisions
30
to
the
teacher.
31
7.
The
adjudicator
shall,
within
fifteen
five
days
after
the
32
hearing,
make
a
decision
and
shall
give
a
copy
of
the
decision
33
to
the
teacher
and
the
secretary
of
the
board.
The
decision
34
of
the
adjudicator
shall
become
the
final
and
binding
decision
35
-89-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
89/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
the
board
unless
either
party
within
ten
days
notifies
the
1
secretary
of
the
board
that
the
decision
is
rejected
.
The
2
board
may
reject
the
decision
by
majority
vote,
by
roll
call,
3
in
open
meeting
and
entered
into
the
minutes
of
the
meeting.
4
The
board
shall
immediately
notify
the
teacher
of
its
decision
5
by
certified
mail.
The
teacher
may
reject
the
adjudicator’s
6
decision
by
notifying
the
board’s
secretary
in
writing
within
7
ten
days
of
the
filing
of
such
decision.
8
Sec.
135.
Section
279.17,
subsection
4,
paragraph
a,
Code
9
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
10
a.
Within
thirty
five
days
after
filing
the
notice
of
11
appeal,
or
within
further
time
allowed
by
the
adjudicator,
12
the
board
shall
transmit
to
the
adjudicator
the
original
or
13
a
certified
copy
of
the
entire
record
of
the
private
hearing
14
which
may
be
the
subject
of
the
petition.
By
stipulation
15
of
the
parties
to
review
the
proceedings,
the
record
of
the
16
case
may
be
shortened.
The
adjudicator
may
require
or
permit
17
subsequent
corrections
or
additions
to
the
shortened
record.
18
Sec.
136.
Section
279.17,
subsection
6,
paragraph
b,
Code
19
2011,
is
amended
by
striking
the
paragraph.
20
Sec.
137.
Section
279.19,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
21
follows:
22
279.19
Probationary
period.
23
1.
The
For
a
teacher
first
employed
by
a
school
district
24
on
or
after
July
1,
2012,
the
first
three
five
consecutive
25
years
of
employment
of
a
the
teacher
in
the
same
that
school
26
district
are
a
probationary
period.
However,
if
the
teacher
27
has
successfully
completed
a
probationary
period
of
employment
28
for
another
school
district
located
in
Iowa,
the
probationary
29
period
in
the
current
district
of
employment
shall
not
exceed
30
one
year.
A
board
of
directors
may
waive
the
probationary
31
period
for
any
teacher
who
previously
has
served
a
probationary
32
period
in
another
school
district
and
the
board
may
extend
the
33
probationary
period
for
an
additional
year
with
the
consent
of
34
the
teacher.
35
-90-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
90/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
2.
In
the
case
of
the
termination
of
a
probationary
1
teacher’s
contract,
the
provisions
of
sections
279.15
and
2
279.16
shall
apply.
However,
if
the
probationary
teacher
is
a
3
beginning
teacher
who
fails
to
demonstrate
competence
in
the
4
Iowa
teaching
standards
in
accordance
with
chapter
284
,
the
5
provisions
of
sections
279.17
and
279.18
shall
also
apply.
6
3.
The
board’s
decision
shall
be
final
and
binding
unless
7
the
termination
was
based
upon
an
alleged
violation
of
a
8
constitutionally
guaranteed
right
of
the
teacher
or
an
alleged
9
violation
of
public
employee
rights
of
the
teacher
under
10
section
20.10
.
11
4.
Notwithstanding
any
provision
to
the
contrary,
the
12
grievance
procedures
of
section
20.18
relating
to
job
13
performance
or
job
retention
shall
not
apply
to
a
teacher
14
during
the
first
two
years
of
the
teacher’s
probationary
15
period.
However,
except
as
provided
in
section
284.8,
this
16
paragraph
subsection
shall
not
apply
to
a
teacher
who
has
17
successfully
completed
a
probationary
period
in
a
school
18
district
in
Iowa.
19
Sec.
138.
Section
279.19A,
subsection
2,
paragraph
a,
Code
20
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
21
a.
An
extracurricular
contract
shall
be
continued
22
automatically
in
force
and
effect
for
equivalent
periods,
23
except
as
modified
or
terminated
by
mutual
agreement
of
24
the
board
of
directors
and
the
employee,
or
terminated
in
25
accordance
with
this
section
.
An
extracurricular
contract
26
shall
initially
be
offered
by
the
employing
board
to
an
27
individual
on
the
same
date
that
contracts
are
offered
to
28
teachers
under
section
279.13
.
An
extracurricular
contract
29
may
be
terminated
at
the
end
of
a
school
year
pursuant
to
30
sections
279.15
through
279.17
and
279.19
.
If
the
school
31
district
offers
an
extracurricular
contract
for
a
sport
for
32
the
subsequent
school
year
to
an
employee
who
is
currently
33
performing
under
an
extracurricular
contract
for
that
sport,
34
and
the
employee
does
not
wish
to
accept
the
extracurricular
35
-91-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
91/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
contract
for
the
subsequent
year,
the
employee
may
resign
from
1
the
extracurricular
contract
within
twenty-one
days
after
it
2
has
been
received.
3
Sec.
139.
Section
279.19B,
subsections
2
and
3,
Code
2011,
4
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
5
2.
An
individual
who
has
been
issued
a
coaching
6
authorization
or
who
possesses
a
teaching
license
with
a
7
coaching
endorsement
but
is
not
issued
a
teaching
contract
8
under
section
279.13
and
who
is
employed
by
the
board
of
9
directors
of
a
school
district
serves
at
the
pleasure
of
the
10
board
of
directors
and
is
not
subject
to
sections
279.13
11
through
279.17,
279.19
,
and
279.27
.
Subsection
1
of
section
12
279.19A
applies
to
coaching
authorizations.
13
3.
The
licensure
and
coaching
authorization
requirements
14
of
this
section
shall
not
apply
to
community
colleges.
15
An
individual
employed
as
a
coach
of
a
community
college
16
interscholastic
athletic
activity
who
is
not
issued
a
teaching
17
contract
under
section
279.13
serves
at
the
pleasure
of
the
18
board
of
directors
of
the
community
college
and
is
not
subject
19
to
sections
279.13
through
279.17,
279.19
,
and
279.27
.
20
Sec.
140.
Section
279.24,
subsection
4,
Code
2011,
is
21
amended
to
read
as
follows:
22
4.
Administrators
employed
in
a
school
district
for
23
less
than
two
five
consecutive
years
are
probationary
24
administrators.
However,
a
school
board
may
waive
the
25
probationary
period
for
any
administrator
who
has
previously
26
served
a
probationary
period
in
another
school
district
and
27
the
school
board
may
extend
the
probationary
period
for
an
28
additional
year
with
the
consent
of
the
administrator.
If
a
29
school
board
determines
that
it
should
terminate
a
probationary
30
administrator’s
contract,
the
school
board
shall
notify
the
31
administrator
not
later
than
May
15
that
the
contract
will
not
32
be
renewed
beyond
the
current
year.
The
notice
shall
be
in
33
writing
by
letter,
personally
delivered,
or
mailed
by
certified
34
mail.
The
notification
shall
be
complete
when
received
by
35
-92-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
92/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
the
administrator.
Within
ten
five
days
after
receiving
the
1
notice,
the
administrator
may
request
a
private
conference
2
with
the
school
board
to
discuss
the
reasons
for
termination.
3
The
school
board’s
decision
to
terminate
a
probationary
4
administrator’s
contract
shall
be
final
unless
the
termination
5
was
based
upon
an
alleged
violation
of
a
constitutionally
6
guaranteed
right
of
the
administrator.
7
Sec.
141.
Section
279.24,
subsection
5,
paragraphs
c
8
through
i,
Code
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
9
c.
Within
five
days
after
receipt
of
the
written
notice
10
that
the
school
board
has
voted
to
consider
termination
11
of
the
contract,
the
administrator
may
request
in
writing
12
to
the
secretary
of
the
school
board
that
the
notification
13
be
forwarded
to
the
board
of
educational
examiners
public
14
employee
relations
board
along
with
a
request
that
the
board
15
of
educational
examiners
public
employee
relations
board
16
submit
a
list
of
five
qualified
administrative
law
judges
17
adjudicators
to
the
parties.
Within
three
days
from
receipt
18
of
the
list
,
the
parties
shall
select
an
administrative
law
19
judge
adjudicator
by
alternately
removing
a
name
from
the
list
20
until
only
one
name
remains.
The
person
whose
name
remains
21
shall
be
the
administrative
law
judge
adjudicator
.
The
parties
22
shall
determine
by
lot
which
party
shall
remove
the
first
name
23
from
the
list.
The
hearing
shall
be
held
no
sooner
than
ten
24
five
days
and
not
later
than
thirty
five
days
following
the
25
administrator’s
request
unless
the
parties
otherwise
agree.
26
If
the
administrator
does
not
request
a
hearing,
the
school
27
board,
not
later
than
May
31,
may
determine
the
continuance
or
28
discontinuance
of
the
contract
and,
if
the
board
determines
to
29
continue
the
administrator’s
contract,
whether
to
suspend
the
30
administrator
with
or
without
pay
for
a
period
specified
by
31
the
board.
School
board
action
shall
be
by
majority
roll
call
32
vote
entered
on
the
minutes
of
the
meeting.
Notice
of
school
33
board
action
shall
be
personally
delivered
or
mailed
to
the
34
administrator.
35
-93-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
93/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
d.
The
administrative
law
judge
adjudicator
selected
shall
1
notify
the
secretary
of
the
school
board
and
the
administrator
2
in
writing
concerning
the
date,
time,
and
location
of
the
3
hearing.
The
school
board
may
be
represented
by
a
legal
4
representative,
if
any,
and
the
administrator
shall
appear
and
5
may
be
represented
by
counsel
or
by
representative,
if
any.
6
A
transcript
or
recording
shall
be
made
of
the
proceedings
7
at
the
hearing.
A
school
board
member
or
administrator
is
8
not
liable
for
any
damage
to
an
administrator
or
school
board
9
member
if
a
statement
made
at
the
hearing
is
determined
to
be
10
erroneous
as
long
as
the
statement
was
made
in
good
faith.
The
11
adjudicator
may
affirm
board
action
or
remand
the
case
to
the
12
board
for
further
proceedings.
The
adjudicator
shall
reverse,
13
modify,
or
grant
any
appropriate
relief
from
the
board
action
14
if
substantial
rights
of
the
administrator
have
been
prejudiced
15
because
the
board’s
action
is
any
of
the
following:
16
(1)
In
violation
of
a
board
rule
or
policy
or
contract.
17
(2)
Unreasonable,
arbitrary,
or
capricious
or
characterized
18
by
an
abuse
of
discretion
or
a
clearly
unwarranted
exercise
of
19
discretion.
20
e.
The
administrative
law
judge
adjudicator
shall,
within
21
ten
five
days
following
the
date
of
the
hearing,
make
a
22
proposed
decision
as
to
whether
or
not
the
administrator
23
should
be
dismissed,
and
shall
give
a
copy
of
the
proposed
24
decision
to
the
administrator
and
the
school
board.
Findings
25
of
fact
shall
be
prepared
by
the
administrative
law
judge
26
adjudicator
.
The
proposed
decision
of
the
administrative
law
27
judge
adjudicator
shall
become
the
final
decision
of
the
school
28
board
unless
within
ten
days
after
the
filing
of
the
decision
29
the
administrator
files
a
written
notice
of
appeal
with
the
30
school
board,
or
the
school
board
on
its
own
motion
determines
31
to
review
the
decision
.
32
f.
If
the
administrator
appeals
to
the
school
board,
or
if
33
the
school
board
determines
on
its
own
motion
to
review
the
34
proposed
decision
of
the
administrative
law
judge,
a
private
35
-94-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
94/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
hearing
shall
be
held
before
the
school
board
within
five
days
1
after
the
petition
for
review,
or
motion
for
review,
has
been
2
made
or
at
such
other
time
as
the
parties
agree.
The
private
3
hearing
is
not
subject
to
chapter
21
.
The
school
board
may
4
hear
the
case
de
novo
upon
the
record
as
submitted
before
the
5
administrative
law
judge.
In
cases
where
there
is
an
appeal
6
from
a
proposed
decision
or
where
a
proposed
decision
is
7
reviewed
on
motion
of
the
school
board,
an
opportunity
shall
be
8
afforded
to
each
party
to
file
exceptions,
present
briefs,
and
9
present
oral
arguments
to
the
school
board
which
is
to
render
10
the
final
decision.
The
secretary
of
the
school
board
shall
11
give
the
administrator
written
notice
of
the
time,
place,
and
12
date
of
the
hearing.
The
school
board
shall
meet
within
five
13
days
after
the
hearing
to
determine
the
question
of
continuance
14
or
discontinuance
of
the
contract
and,
if
the
board
determines
15
to
continue
the
administrator’s
contract,
whether
to
suspend
16
the
administrator
with
or
without
pay
for
a
period
specified
17
by
the
board.
The
school
board
shall
make
findings
of
fact
18
which
shall
be
based
solely
on
the
evidence
in
the
record
and
19
on
matters
officially
noticed
in
the
record.
20
g.
The
decision
of
the
school
board
shall
be
in
writing
21
and
shall
include
findings
of
fact
and
conclusions
of
law,
22
separately
stated.
Findings
of
fact,
if
set
forth
in
statutory
23
language,
shall
be
accompanied
by
a
concise
and
explicit
24
statement
of
the
underlying
facts
supporting
the
findings.
25
Each
conclusion
of
law
shall
be
supported
by
cited
authority
26
or
by
reasoned
opinion.
27
h.
When
the
school
board
has
reached
a
decision,
opinion,
28
or
conclusion,
it
shall
convene
in
open
meeting
and
by
roll
29
call
vote
determine
the
continuance
or
discontinuance
of
30
the
administrator’s
contract
and,
if
the
board
votes
to
31
continue
the
administrator’s
contract,
whether
to
suspend
the
32
administrator
with
or
without
pay
for
a
period
specified
by
33
the
board.
The
record
of
the
private
conference
and
findings
34
of
fact
and
exceptions
shall
be
exempt
from
the
provisions
of
35
-95-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
95/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
chapter
22
.
1
f.
The
secretary
of
the
school
board
shall
immediately
2
personally
deliver
or
mail
notice
of
the
school
board’s
3
adjudicator’s
action
to
the
administrator.
4
i.
The
administrator
may
within
thirty
days
after
5
notification
by
the
school
board
of
discontinuance
of
the
6
contract
appeal
to
the
district
court
of
the
county
in
which
7
the
administrative
office
of
the
school
district
is
located.
8
Sec.
142.
Section
279.24,
subsection
6,
Code
2011,
is
9
amended
by
striking
the
subsection.
10
Sec.
143.
Section
279.27,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
11
follows:
12
279.27
Discharge
of
teacher.
13
A
teacher
may
be
discharged
at
any
time
during
the
14
contract
year
for
just
cause.
The
superintendent
or
the
15
superintendent’s
designee,
shall
notify
the
teacher
immediately
16
that
the
superintendent
will
recommend
in
writing
to
the
board
17
at
a
regular
or
special
meeting
of
the
board
held
not
more
18
than
fifteen
days
after
notification
has
been
given
to
the
19
teacher
that
the
teacher’s
continuing
contract
be
terminated
20
effective
immediately
following
a
decision
of
the
board.
The
21
procedure
for
dismissal
shall
be
as
provided
in
section
279.15,
22
subsection
2
,
and
sections
279.16
to
,
279.17,
and
279.19
.
The
23
superintendent
may
suspend
a
teacher
under
this
section
pending
24
hearing
and
determination
by
the
board.
25
Sec.
144.
Section
284.3,
subsection
2,
paragraph
a,
Code
26
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
27
a.
For
purposes
of
comprehensive
evaluations
for
beginning
28
teachers
required
to
allow
beginning
teachers
to
progress
to
29
career
teachers,
standards
and
criteria
that
are
the
Iowa
30
teaching
standards
specified
in
subsection
1
and
the
criteria
31
for
the
Iowa
teaching
standards
developed
by
the
department
in
32
accordance
with
section
256.9,
subsection
46
.
These
standards
33
and
criteria
shall
be
set
forth
in
an
instrument
provided
by
34
the
department.
The
comprehensive
evaluation
and
instrument
35
-96-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
96/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
are
not
subject
to
negotiations
or
grievance
procedures
1
pursuant
to
chapter
20
or
determinations
made
by
the
board
of
2
directors
under
section
279.14
.
A
local
school
board
and
its
3
certified
bargaining
representative
may
negotiate,
pursuant
to
4
chapter
20
,
evaluation
and
grievance
procedures
for
beginning
5
teachers
that
are
not
in
conflict
with
this
chapter
.
If,
in
6
accordance
with
section
279.19
,
a
beginning
teacher
appeals
the
7
determination
of
a
school
board
to
an
adjudicator
under
section
8
279.17
,
the
adjudicator
selected
shall
have
successfully
9
completed
training
related
to
the
Iowa
teacher
standards,
the
10
criteria
adopted
by
the
state
board
of
education
in
accordance
11
with
subsection
3
,
and
any
additional
training
required
under
12
rules
adopted
by
the
public
employment
relations
board
in
13
cooperation
with
the
state
board
of
education.
14
Sec.
145.
Section
284.6,
subsection
1,
unnumbered
paragraph
15
1,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
16
The
department
shall
coordinate
a
implement
the
statewide
17
network
of
plan
for
professional
development
for
Iowa
teachers
18
practitioners
established
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
19
32.
A
school
district
shall
utilize
the
area
professional
20
development
plan
approved
by
the
director
of
the
department
21
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
69,
unless
the
school
22
district
is
granted
a
waiver
in
accordance
with
section
23
256.9,
subsection
69
.
A
In
addition,
a
school
district
or
24
professional
development
provider
that
offers
a
career
and
25
professional
development
program
programs
in
accordance
26
with
section
256.9,
subsection
subsections
46
,
and
69
shall
27
demonstrate
that
the
program
contains
programs
contain
the
28
following:
29
Sec.
146.
Section
284.6,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
30
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
31
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
5A.
The
director
may
waive
the
requirements
32
relating
to
the
development
and
review
of
an
individual
teacher
33
professional
development
plan
for
a
school
district
that
34
utilizes
a
peer
review
teacher
evaluation
system
in
which
35
-97-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
97/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
consulting
teachers,
in
conjunction
with
school
administrators,
1
make
formal
evaluations
of
the
school
district’s
teachers,
2
including
but
not
limited
to
each
teacher’s
professional
3
growth
and
employment
status.
Notwithstanding
section
284.8,
4
subsection
1,
if
the
school
district
is
granted
a
waiver
5
pursuant
to
this
subsection,
the
review
conducted
pursuant
to
6
section
284.8,
subsection
1,
shall
include
a
teacher’s
review
7
conducted
utilizing
the
peer
review
teacher
evaluation
system.
8
Sec.
147.
Section
284.8,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
9
following
new
subsection:
10
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
5.
Notwithstanding
any
provision
to
11
the
contrary,
if
a
teacher
does
not
successfully
complete
an
12
intensive
assistance
program
as
required
under
subsection
4,
13
the
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district
may
place
the
14
teacher
on
probationary
status
in
accordance
with
section
15
279.19
for
the
school
year
following
the
year
in
which
the
16
teacher
participated
in
the
intensive
assistance
program.
17
Sec.
148.
TRANSITIONAL
PROVISION.
The
probationary
period
18
provisions
of
section
279.19,
Code
2011,
shall
apply
to
a
19
teacher
employed
by
a
school
district
prior
to
July
1,
2012,
20
until
the
end
of
the
teacher’s
continuous
employment
by
that
21
school
district
or
until
the
teacher
successfully
completes
the
22
probationary
period
in
accordance
with
section
279.19,
Code
23
2011.
24
Sec.
149.
REPEAL.
Section
279.18,
Code
2011,
is
repealed.
25
DIVISION
XV
26
CHARTER
SCHOOL
CHANGES
27
Sec.
150.
Section
256F.1,
subsections
1
and
2,
Code
2011,
28
are
amended
by
striking
the
subsections.
29
Sec.
151.
Section
256F.1,
subsection
3,
unnumbered
30
paragraph
1,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
31
The
purpose
of
a
charter
school
or
an
innovation
zone
school
32
established
pursuant
to
this
chapter
shall
be
to
accomplish
the
33
following:
34
Sec.
152.
Section
256F.1,
subsection
4,
Code
2011,
is
35
-98-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
98/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
amended
by
striking
the
subsection
and
inserting
in
lieu
1
thereof
the
following:
2
4.
This
section
shall
not
be
construed
to
provide
a
means
3
to
keep
open
a
school
that
the
board
of
directors
of
a
school
4
district
closes.
However,
a
school
board
may
endorse
or
5
authorize
the
establishing
of
a
charter
school
to
replace
the
6
school
the
board
closes.
Applicants
seeking
a
charter
under
7
this
circumstance
shall
demonstrate
to
the
state
board
that
8
the
charter
sought
is
substantially
different
in
purpose
and
9
program
from
the
school
the
board
closes
and
that
the
proposed
10
charter
satisfies
the
requirements
of
this
section.
The
state
11
board
shall
not
approve
an
application
submitted
under
section
12
256F.5
if
the
application
does
not
comply
with
this
subsection.
13
Sec.
153.
Section
256F.2,
subsections
1
and
6,
Code
2011,
14
are
amended
by
striking
the
subsections
and
inserting
in
lieu
15
thereof
the
following:
16
1.
“Applicant
”
means
an
entity
eligible
to
submit
to
the
17
state
board
an
application
to
charter
a
school
in
accordance
18
with
this
chapter.
“Applicant”
includes
any
of
the
following:
19
a.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
school
district.
20
b.
A
consortium
consisting
of
the
boards
of
directors
of
two
21
or
more
school
districts.
22
c.
An
area
education
agency
board.
23
d.
A
consortium
consisting
of
the
boards
of
directors
of
24
an
area
education
agency
and
one
or
more
school
districts,
at
25
least
one
of
which
is
located
within
the
boundaries
of
the
area
26
education
agency.
27
e.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
community
college.
28
f.
A
consortium
consisting
of
the
boards
of
directors
of
a
29
community
college
and
one
or
more
school
districts,
at
least
30
one
of
which
is
located
within
the
boundaries
of
the
community
31
college.
32
g.
An
institution
of
higher
education
governed
by
the
state
33
board
of
regents.
34
h.
A
consortium
consisting
of
an
institution
of
higher
35
-99-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
99/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
education
governed
by
the
state
board
of
regents
and
the
board
1
of
directors
of
one
or
more
school
districts.
2
i.
A
consortium
consisting
of
one
or
more
accredited
private
3
institutions
as
defined
in
section
261.9,
all
of
which
shall
be
4
exempt
from
taxation
under
section
501(c)(3)
of
the
Internal
5
Revenue
Code,
and
the
board
of
directors
of
one
or
more
school
6
districts.
7
j.
A
consortium
consisting
of
the
governing
body
of
a
city
8
or
county
with
a
population
over
one
hundred
thousand
and
the
9
board
of
directors
of
one
or
more
school
districts
located,
at
10
least
in
part,
within
the
boundaries
of
the
city
or
county.
11
k.
A
nonsectarian,
nonreligious
charitable
organization
that
12
is
exempt
from
taxation
under
section
501(c)(3)
of
the
Internal
13
Revenue
Code.
14
6.
“Operator”
means
an
applicant
approved
by
the
state
board
15
to
charter
a
school
under
this
chapter.
16
Sec.
154.
Section
256F.2,
subsection
7,
Code
2011,
is
17
amended
by
striking
the
subsection.
18
Sec.
155.
Section
256F.3,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
striking
19
the
section
and
inserting
in
lieu
thereof
the
following:
20
256F.3
Duties
of
the
department.
21
The
department
shall
do
the
following:
22
1.
Develop
and
implement
an
orientation
program
for
23
operators.
An
operator
shall
successfully
complete
the
24
orientation
program
prior
to
chartering
a
school
pursuant
to
25
this
chapter.
The
program
shall
include
but
not
be
limited
26
to
accountability
requirements,
reporting
requirements,
and
27
financial
management.
If
the
operator
does
not
successfully
28
complete
the
orientation
program
in
the
time
specified
by
the
29
department,
the
state
board
shall
reevaluate
the
operator’s
30
application
and
may
deny
the
application.
If
the
state
board
31
denies
an
application
under
this
subsection,
the
decision
of
32
the
state
board
is
final
agency
action
under
chapter
17A.
33
2.
Develop
and
implement
or
approve
orientation
programs
34
for
members
of
the
boards
of
directors
of
charter
schools,
35
-100-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
100/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
including
but
not
limited
to
orientation
on
the
charter
school
1
board’s
role
and
responsibilities,
employment
policies
and
2
practices,
and
financial
management.
3
3.
Monitor
and
evaluate
the
fiscal,
operational,
and
4
student
performance
of
the
charter
school
annually
and
provide
5
a
written
annual
performance
evaluation
to
the
charter
school
6
board
and
the
state
board.
The
department
may
for
this
7
purpose
annually
collect
from
a
charter
school
a
reasonable
8
fee
established
by
rule
by
the
state
board
based
on
the
number
9
of
students
who
are
enrolled
in
the
charter
school.
The
fee
10
structure
shall
be
stated
in
the
charter
school
contract.
11
4.
Provide,
every
fifth
year
in
which
a
charter
school
is
12
in
operation
and
before
the
state
board
considers
renewing
13
a
charter
school’s
contract,
a
formal
written
review
of
the
14
annual
evaluations
conducted
pursuant
to
subsection
3.
15
Sec.
156.
Section
256F.4,
subsections
1,
5,
and
7,
Code
16
2011,
are
amended
by
striking
the
subsections.
17
Sec.
157.
Section
256F.4,
subsections
2,
6,
and
8,
Code
18
2011,
are
amended
to
read
as
follows:
19
2.
Although
a
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
school
20
may
elect
to
comply
with
one
or
more
provisions
of
statute
or
21
administrative
rule,
a
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
school
22
is
exempt
from
all
statutes
and
administrative
rules
applicable
23
to
a
school,
a
school
board,
or
a
school
district,
except
that
24
the
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
school
shall
meet
the
25
requirements
of
this
chapter
and
shall
do
all
of
the
following:
26
a.
Meet
all
applicable
federal,
state,
and
local
health
and
27
safety
requirements
and
laws
prohibiting
discrimination
on
the
28
basis
of
race,
creed,
color,
sex,
sexual
orientation,
gender
29
identity,
national
origin,
religion,
ancestry,
or
disability.
30
A
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
school
shall
be
subject
to
31
any
court-ordered
desegregation
plan
in
effect
for
the
school
32
district
at
the
time
the
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
33
school
application
is
approved.
34
b.
Operate
as
a
nonsectarian,
nonreligious
public
school.
35
-101-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
101/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
c.
Be
free
of
tuition
and
application
fees
to
Iowa
resident
1
students
between
the
ages
of
five
and
twenty-one
years.
2
d.
Be
subject
to
and
comply
with
chapters
216
and
216A
3
relating
to
civil
and
human
rights.
4
e.
Provide
Make
special
education
programs
and
services
5
available
to
students
requiring
special
education
in
accordance
6
with
chapter
256B
.
7
f.
Be
subject
to
the
same
financial
audits,
audit
8
procedures,
and
audit
requirements
as
a
school
district.
The
9
audit
shall
be
consistent
with
the
requirements
of
sections
10
11.6
,
11.14
,
11.19
,
256.9,
subsection
20
,
section
256F.8,
and
11
section
279.29
,
except
to
the
extent
deviations
are
necessary
12
because
of
the
program
at
the
charter
school.
The
department,
13
the
auditor
of
state,
or
the
legislative
services
agency
may
14
conduct
financial,
program,
or
compliance
audits.
15
g.
Be
subject
eligible
to
and
comply
with
participate
in
16
the
student
achievement
and
teacher
quality
program
under
17
chapter
284
relating
to
the
student
achievement
and
teacher
18
quality
program
.
A
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
school
19
that
complies
with
chapter
284
shall
receive
state
moneys
or
20
be
eligible
to
receive
state
moneys
calculated
as
provided
in
21
section
257.10,
subsections
9
and
10
,
and
section
257.37A
as
if
22
it
did
not
operate
under
a
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
23
school
contract
.
24
h.
Be
subject
to
and
comply
with
chapters
chapter
20
and
25
279
relating
to
contracts
with
and
discharge
of
teachers
and
26
administrators.
27
i.
Be
subject
to
and
comply
with
the
provisions
of
chapter
28
285
relating
to
the
transportation
of
students
,
except
that
the
29
provisions
of
section
285.1,
subsections
14,
15,
16,
and
17,
30
shall
not
apply
.
31
j.
Meetings
and
records
of
the
advisory
council
are
subject
32
to
the
provisions
of
chapters
21
and
22
.
33
j.
Comply
with
sections
279.9,
280.17A,
280.17B,
280.21B,
34
280.24,
and
280.28,
and
may
suspend
or
expel
a
student
only
35
-102-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
102/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
as
provided
in
section
282.4.
A
decision
made
as
provided
in
1
section
282.4
is
subject
to
appeal
under
section
290.1.
2
k.
Comply
with
all
statutes
and
administrative
rules
3
relating
to
student
records,
including
but
not
limited
to
4
section
22.7,
subsection
1,
and
sections
256H.1,
280.19A,
5
280.25,
and
280.29,
and
shall
submit
data
to
the
department
6
for
purposes
of
the
department’s
comprehensive
management
7
information
system.
8
l.
Comply
with
the
requirements
of
chapter
283A.
9
m.
Comply
with
any
statewide
accountability
requirements
in
10
statute
or
administrative
rule
governing
high
school
graduation
11
requirements,
the
core
curriculum,
core
content
standards,
12
and
assessments.
The
charter
school
shall
issue
high
school
13
diplomas
to
students
who
successfully
meet
the
graduation
14
requirements
of
the
charter
school.
15
6.
Notwithstanding
subsection
2
,
a
charter
school
or
16
innovation
zone
school
shall
meet
the
requirements
of
section
17
256.7,
subsection
21
.
18
8.
A
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
consortium
may
shall
19
enter
into
contracts
in
accordance
with
chapter
26
.
20
Sec.
158.
Section
256F.4,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
21
the
following
new
subsection:
22
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
2A.
A
charter
school
shall
not
be
used
as
23
a
method
of
providing
education
to
or
generating
revenue
for
24
students
who
are
receiving
competent
private
instruction
in
25
accordance
with
chapter
299A.
26
Sec.
159.
Section
256F.4,
subsections
3
and
4,
Code
2011,
27
are
amended
by
striking
the
subsections
and
inserting
in
lieu
28
thereof
the
following:
29
3.
The
primary
focus
of
a
charter
school
shall
be
to
provide
30
a
comprehensive
program
of
instruction
for
at
least
one
grade
31
or
age
group
from
five
through
twenty-one
years
of
age.
32
4.
A
charter
school
is
a
municipality
for
the
purposes
of
33
tort
liability
under
chapter
670.
34
Sec.
160.
Section
256F.5,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
35
-103-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
103/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
by
striking
the
section
and
inserting
in
lieu
thereof
the
1
following:
2
256F.5
Application.
3
1.
An
application
to
operate
a
charter
school
pursuant
to
4
this
chapter
shall
include
but
not
be
limited
to
the
following:
5
a.
A
business
plan
that
documents
the
proposed
charter
6
school’s
mission
statement;
school
purposes;
program
design;
7
description
of
a
graduation
plan,
where
applicable;
financial
8
plan;
governance
and
management
structure;
and
background
9
and
experience
of
the
applicants
and
the
initial
board
and
10
instructional
staff,
plus
any
other
information
the
state
board
11
requests.
An
applicant
shall
file
a
separate
application
for
12
each
school
the
applicant
intends
to
charter.
13
b.
A
statement
of
assurances
of
legal
compliance
prescribed
14
by
the
state
board.
15
c.
The
applicant’s
ability
to
implement
the
procedures
16
and
satisfy
the
criteria
for
chartering
a
school
under
this
17
chapter.
18
d.
The
measures
that
will
be
implemented
to
provide
for
19
oversight
of
the
charter
school’s
academic,
financial,
and
20
operational
performance,
and
to
ensure
compliance
with
the
21
terms
of
any
written
contract
entered
into
by
the
charter
22
school
board
of
directors
and
the
state
board.
23
e.
A
statement
of
support
or
nonsupport
from
the
board
of
24
directors
of
the
school
district,
in
which
the
charter
school
25
would
be
located.
The
statement
shall
be
submitted
to
the
26
applicant
in
a
timely
manner
by
the
school
district
board.
27
f.
A
statement
demonstrating
community
support
and
student
28
need.
29
g.
A
statement
of
admission
policies
and
procedures.
30
h.
The
types
and
amounts
of
insurance
liability
coverage
to
31
be
obtained
by
the
charter
school.
32
i.
How
special
instruction,
programs,
and
services
for
33
children
requiring
special
education
and
English
language
34
learners
under
chapter
256B
and
section
280.4
will
be
made
35
-104-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
104/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
available
and
a
description
of
the
financial
parameters
within
1
which
the
special
instruction,
programs,
and
services
will
be
2
made
available.
3
2.
If
the
applicant
includes
a
school
district
pursuant
4
to
section
256F.2,
subsection
1,
paragraph
“a”
,
“b”
,
“d”
,
“f”
,
5
“h”
,
“i”
,
or
“j”
,
that
will,
under
the
plan
submitted,
convert
6
an
existing
attendance
center
operated
by
the
school
district
7
into
a
charter
school
in
accordance
with
this
chapter,
the
8
application
shall
demonstrate
the
support
of
at
least
fifty
9
percent
of
the
teachers
employed
at
the
school
on
the
date
10
of
the
submission
of
the
application
and
fifty
percent
of
11
the
parents
or
guardians
voting
whose
children
are
enrolled
12
at
the
school,
provided
that
a
majority
of
the
parents
or
13
guardians
eligible
to
vote
participate
in
the
ballot
process,
14
according
to
procedures
established
by
rules
of
the
state
15
board.
Conversion
of
an
existing
school
to
a
charter
school
if
16
approved
pursuant
to
this
chapter
shall
occur
at
the
beginning
17
of
an
academic
year.
18
3.
a.
The
state
board
shall
approve
or
disapprove
an
19
application
within
ninety
business
days
of
receipt
of
the
20
application.
21
b.
If
the
state
board
disapproves
the
application,
the
state
22
board
shall
notify
the
applicant
of
the
specific
deficiencies
23
in
writing
and
the
applicant
shall
have
twenty
business
days
to
24
address
the
deficiencies
to
the
state
board’s
satisfaction.
25
(1)
If
the
applicant
addresses
the
deficiencies
within
the
26
time
specified,
the
state
board
shall
at
its
next
regularly
27
scheduled
meeting
make
a
final
decision
to
approve
or
28
disapprove
the
application.
29
(2)
If
the
applicant
fails
to
address
the
deficiencies
in
30
the
time
specified,
the
state
board
shall
notify
the
applicant
31
that
the
application
is
denied
and
the
decision
of
the
state
32
board
is
final
agency
action
under
chapter
17A.
33
c.
An
applicant
whose
application
is
denied
pursuant
to
the
34
process
specified
in
this
subsection
shall
not
submit
another
35
-105-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
105/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
application
until
the
expiration
of
at
least
one
calendar
year
1
after
notification
of
the
denial
of
application.
2
4.
The
state
board
shall
establish
criteria
for
application
3
approval
that
at
a
minimum
consider
the
following:
4
a.
A
comprehensive
review
of
the
application.
5
b.
The
available
capacity
and
infrastructure
identified
in
6
the
plan.
7
c.
Contracting
process
specified
in
the
plan.
8
d.
Ongoing
oversight
and
evaluation
processes
relating
to
9
administration
and
staffing.
10
e.
Charter
school
contract
and
contract
renewal
criteria
and
11
processes.
12
5.
Approval
of
an
application
and
renewal
of
a
charter
by
13
the
state
board
shall
not
be
conditioned
upon
the
bargaining
14
unit
status
of
the
employees
of
the
school.
15
Sec.
161.
Section
256F.6,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
striking
16
the
section
and
inserting
in
lieu
thereof
the
following:
17
256F.6
Formation
of
school
——
board.
18
1.
An
operator
who
successfully
completes
the
orientation
19
program
required
pursuant
to
section
256F.3,
subsection
20
1,
before
entering
into
a
contract
or
other
agreement
for
21
professional
or
other
services,
goods,
or
facilities,
shall
22
incorporate
as
a
nonprofit
corporation
under
chapter
504
and
23
shall
establish
an
initial
board
of
directors
composed
of
at
24
least
five
voting
members,
who
are
not
related
parties,
until
a
25
timely
election
for
members
of
the
ongoing
charter
school
board
26
of
directors
is
held
according
to
the
school’s
articles
and
27
bylaws.
28
2.
Members
of
the
charter
school
board
of
directors
29
established
under
the
school’s
articles
and
bylaws
shall
30
be
elected
before
the
school
completes
its
third
year
of
31
operation.
The
articles
and
bylaws
shall
require
that
the
32
board
be
composed
of
not
less
than
five
voting
members.
The
33
articles
and
bylaws
shall
include
clear
policies
regarding
34
conflicts
of
interest,
standards
of
responsibility,
and
35
-106-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
106/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
obedience
to
law,
fairness,
and
honesty.
1
3.
Staff
members
employed
at
the
school
and
all
parents
2
or
guardians
of
children
enrolled
in
the
school
are
the
3
voters
eligible
to
elect
the
members
of
the
school’s
board
of
4
directors.
5
4.
A
charter
school
shall
notify
eligible
voters
of
the
6
school
board
election
dates
at
least
thirty
days
before
the
7
election.
Board
elections
shall
be
held
during
the
school
year
8
but
may
not
be
conducted
on
days
when
the
school
is
closed
for
9
holidays
or
vacations.
10
5.
a.
Any
charter
school
board
of
directors
shall
be
11
composed
of
the
following:
12
(1)
Notwithstanding
section
279.7A,
at
least
one
licensed
13
teacher
employed
at
the
school.
14
(2)
At
least
one
parent
or
legal
guardian
of
a
student
15
enrolled
in
the
charter
school
who
is
not
an
employee
of
the
16
charter
school.
17
(3)
At
least
one
interested
community
member
who
is
not
18
employed
by
the
charter
school
and
does
not
have
a
child
19
enrolled
in
the
school.
20
b.
The
majority
of
members
on
the
board
may
be
teachers,
21
notwithstanding
section
279.7A.
22
c.
The
chief
financial
officer
and
the
chief
administrator
23
of
the
charter
school,
if
elected,
shall
only
serve
as
ex
24
officio,
nonvoting
board
members.
25
d.
Charter
school
employees
shall
not
serve
on
the
board
26
except
as
provided
in
this
subsection.
27
e.
Except
as
provided
in
section
279.7A,
contractors
28
providing
facilities,
goods,
or
services
to
a
charter
school
29
shall
not
serve
on
the
board.
30
f.
Board
articles
and
bylaws
shall
outline
the
process
31
and
procedures
for
changing
the
board’s
governance
model,
32
consistent
with
chapter
504.
33
6.
A
charter
school
board
may
change
the
governance
model
34
set
forth
in
the
application
or
in
the
articles
and
bylaws
35
-107-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
107/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
the
charter
school
only
if
the
change
conforms
with
this
1
section
and
a
majority
of
the
board
approves
the
change;
the
2
licensed
teachers
employed
by
the
school
approve
the
change;
3
and
the
state
board
approves
the
change.
4
7.
a.
The
state
board
may
permit
a
charter
school
board
5
to
expand
the
operation
of
the
charter
school
to
additional
6
sites
or
to
add
grades
at
the
school
beyond
those
described
7
in
the
operator’s
approved
application
only
after
submitting
8
a
supplemental
affidavit
for
approval
to
the
state
board
9
in
a
form
and
manner
prescribed
by
the
state
board.
The
10
supplemental
affidavit
shall
include
the
following:
11
(1)
A
proposed
expansion
plan
that
demonstrates
need
and
12
projected
enrollment.
13
(2)
Documentation
that
the
expansion
is
warranted,
at
a
14
minimum,
by
longitudinal
data
demonstrating
students’
improved
15
academic
performance
and
growth
on
student
assessments.
16
(3)
Documentation
that
the
charter
school
is
financially
17
sound
and
the
financing
the
charter
school
needs
to
implement
18
the
proposed
expansion
exists.
19
(4)
Documentation
that
the
charter
school
has
the
20
governance
structure
and
management
capacity
to
carry
out
the
21
expansion.
22
b.
The
state
board
shall
have
sixty
business
days
to
review
23
and
comment
on
the
supplemental
affidavit.
The
state
board
24
shall
notify
the
charter
school
board
of
any
deficiencies
in
25
the
supplemental
affidavit
and
the
charter
school
board
shall
26
have
twenty
business
days
to
address,
to
the
state
board’s
27
satisfaction,
any
deficiencies
in
the
supplemental
affidavit.
28
The
school
shall
not
expand
to
additional
sites
or
add
grades
29
until
the
state
board
approves
the
supplemental
affidavit.
30
The
state
board’s
approval
or
disapproval
of
a
supplemental
31
affidavit
is
final
agency
action.
32
8.
The
charter
school
board
of
directors
is
a
government
or
33
governmental
body
for
purposes
of
chapters
21
and
22.
34
9.
Except
as
provided
in
subsection
5,
members
of
the
board
35
-108-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
108/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
are
subject
to
section
279.7A.
1
Sec.
162.
Section
256F.8,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
striking
2
the
section
and
inserting
in
lieu
thereof
the
following:
3
256F.8
Audit
report.
4
1.
The
charter
school
shall
annually
submit
an
audit
report
5
to
the
state
board
by
December
31.
6
2.
The
charter
school,
with
the
assistance
of
the
auditor
7
conducting
the
audit,
shall
include
with
the
report
a
copy
8
of
all
charter
school
agreements
for
corporate
management
9
services.
If
the
entity
that
provides
the
professional
10
services
to
the
charter
school
is
exempt
from
taxation
under
11
section
501
of
the
Internal
Revenue
Code
of
1986,
that
entity
12
must
file
with
the
state
board
by
February
15
a
copy
of
the
13
annual
return
required
under
section
6033
of
the
Internal
14
Revenue
Code
of
1986.
15
3.
If
the
audit
report
finds
that
a
material
weakness
16
exists
in
the
financial
reporting
systems
of
a
charter
school,
17
the
charter
school
shall
submit
a
written
report
to
the
state
18
board
at
its
first
annual
meeting
explaining
how
the
material
19
weakness
will
be
resolved.
An
auditor
conducting
the
audit
20
of
the
charter
school,
as
a
condition
of
providing
financial
21
services
to
a
charter
school,
shall
agree
to
make
available
22
information
about
a
charter
school’s
financial
audit
to
the
23
state
board
upon
request.
24
Sec.
163.
Section
256F.9,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
striking
25
the
section
and
inserting
in
lieu
thereof
the
following:
26
256F.9
Admission
requirements.
27
1.
A
charter
school
may
limit
admission
to
the
following:
28
a.
Students
within
an
age
group
or
grade
level.
29
b.
Students
who
are
either
at
risk
of
dropping
out
or
have
30
dropped
out
of
school.
31
c.
Residents
of
a
specific
geographic
area
in
which
the
32
school
is
located
when
the
majority
of
students
served
by
the
33
school
are
eligible
for
free
and
reduced
price
meals
under
34
the
federal
National
School
Lunch
Act
and
the
federal
Child
35
-109-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
109/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
Nutrition
Act
of
1966,
42
U.S.C.
§
1751-1785.
1
2.
A
charter
school
shall
enroll
an
eligible
student
who
2
submits
a
timely
application,
unless
the
number
of
applications
3
exceeds
the
capacity
of
a
program,
class,
grade
level,
or
4
building.
In
such
case,
students
shall
be
accepted
by
lot.
5
The
charter
school
shall
develop
and
publish
a
lottery
policy
6
and
process
for
use
when
accepting
students
by
lot.
7
3.
A
charter
school
shall
give
enrollment
preference
to
8
a
sibling
of
an
enrolled
student
and
to
a
foster
child
of
9
that
student’s
parents
and
may
give
preference
for
enrolling
10
children
of
the
school’s
staff
before
accepting
other
students
11
by
lot.
12
4.
A
charter
school
shall
not
limit
admission
to
students
13
on
the
basis
of
intellectual
ability,
measures
of
achievement
14
or
aptitude,
or
athletic
ability
and
shall
not
establish
any
15
criteria
or
requirements
for
admission
that
are
inconsistent
16
with
this
section.
17
5.
The
charter
school
shall
not
distribute
any
services
18
or
goods
of
value
to
students,
parents,
or
guardians
as
an
19
inducement,
term,
or
condition
of
enrolling
a
student
in
a
20
charter
school.
21
Sec.
164.
Section
256F.10,
Code
2011,
is
amended
by
striking
22
the
section
and
inserting
in
lieu
thereof
the
following:
23
256F.10
Employment
and
other
operating
matters.
24
A
charter
school
shall
employ
or
contract
with
necessary
25
teachers
and
administrators,
as
defined
by
chapter
256,
who
26
hold
valid
licenses
and
endorsements
to
perform
the
particular
27
service
for
which
they
are
employed
in
the
school.
The
school
28
may
employ
necessary
employees
who
are
not
required
to
hold
29
teaching
licenses
to
perform
duties
other
than
teaching
and
may
30
contract
for
other
services.
31
Sec.
165.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.11
Leased
space.
32
If
space
to
be
leased
is
constructed
as
a
school
facility,
33
a
charter
school
may
lease
such
space
from
a
school
district
34
or
other
public
organization;
private,
nonprofit
nonsectarian
35
-110-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
110/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
organization;
private
property
owner;
or
a
sectarian
1
organization.
2
Sec.
166.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.12
Affiliated
nonprofit
3
building
corporation.
4
1.
A
charter
school
may
organize
an
affiliated
nonprofit
5
building
corporation
to
renovate
or
purchase
an
existing
6
facility
to
serve
as
a
school
or
to
construct
a
new
school
7
facility
as
provided
in
subsection
4
or
5.
8
2.
An
affiliated
nonprofit
building
corporation
shall
meet
9
all
of
the
following
conditions:
10
a.
Be
incorporated
under
chapter
504
and
comply
with
11
applicable
internal
revenue
service
regulations.
12
b.
Submit
annually
to
the
state
board
a
list
of
current
13
board
members
and
a
copy
of
the
corporation’s
annual
audit.
14
3.
An
affiliated
nonprofit
building
corporation
shall
not
15
serve
as
the
leasing
agent
for
property
or
facilities
it
does
16
not
own.
The
state
is
immune
from
liability
resulting
from
a
17
contract
between
a
charter
school
and
an
affiliated
nonprofit
18
building
corporation.
19
4.
A
charter
school
may
organize
an
affiliated
nonprofit
20
building
corporation
to
renovate
or
purchase
an
existing
21
facility
to
serve
as
a
school
if
the
charter
school
meets
the
22
following
criteria:
23
a.
Has
been
operating
for
at
least
five
consecutive
school
24
years.
25
b.
Has
had
a
net
positive
unreserved
general
fund
balance
as
26
of
June
30
in
the
preceding
five
fiscal
years.
27
c.
Has
a
long-range
strategic
and
financial
plan.
28
d.
Completes
a
feasibility
study
of
available
buildings.
29
e.
Documents
enrollment
projections
and
the
need
to
use
30
an
affiliated
nonprofit
building
corporation
to
renovate
or
31
purchase
an
existing
facility
to
serve
as
a
school.
32
5.
A
charter
school
may
organize
an
affiliated
nonprofit
33
building
corporation
to
construct
a
new
school
facility
if
the
34
charter
school
meets
the
following
conditions:
35
-111-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
111/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
a.
Lacks
facilities
available
to
serve
as
a
school.
1
b.
Has
been
operating
for
at
least
eight
consecutive
school
2
years.
3
c.
Has
had
a
net
positive
unreserved
general
fund
balance
as
4
of
June
30
in
the
preceding
eight
fiscal
years.
5
d.
Completes
a
feasibility
study
of
facility
options.
6
e.
Has
a
long-range
strategic
and
financial
plan
that
7
includes
enrollment
projections
and
demonstrates
the
need
for
8
constructing
a
new
school
facility.
9
Sec.
167.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.13
Collective
bargaining.
10
Employees
of
the
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
school
may,
11
if
otherwise
eligible,
organize
under
chapter
20
and
comply
12
with
its
provisions.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
13
school
is
a
public
employer,
for
the
purposes
of
chapter
20,
14
upon
formation
of
one
or
more
bargaining
units
at
the
school.
15
Bargaining
units
at
the
school
shall
be
separate
from
any
other
16
units
within
the
school
district
in
which
the
charter
school
17
is
located,
except
that
bargaining
units
may
remain
part
of
18
the
appropriate
bargaining
unit
of
the
school
district
within
19
which
the
charter
school
is
located
if
the
employees
of
the
20
charter
school,
the
board
of
directors
of
the
charter
school,
21
the
exclusive
representative
of
the
appropriate
bargaining
unit
22
in
the
school
district,
and
the
board
of
the
school
district
23
agree
to
include
the
employees
in
the
appropriate
bargaining
24
unit
of
the
school
district.
25
Sec.
168.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.14
Teacher
retirement.
26
Teachers
in
a
charter
school
are
public
school
teachers
for
27
the
purposes
of
chapter
97B.
28
Sec.
169.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.15
Causes
for
nonrenewal
or
29
termination
of
charter
school
contract.
30
1.
The
state
board
may
decline
to
renew
a
contract
entered
31
into
with
the
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
school
at
the
end
32
of
the
contract
term
for
any
ground
listed
in
subsection
3.
33
The
state
board
may
unilaterally
terminate
a
contract
during
34
the
term
of
the
contract
for
any
ground
listed
in
subsection
3.
35
-112-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
112/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
2.
At
least
sixty
business
days
before
not
renewing
or
1
terminating
a
contract,
the
state
board
shall
notify
the
board
2
of
directors
of
the
charter
school
of
the
proposed
action
in
3
writing.
The
notice
shall
state
the
grounds
for
the
proposed
4
action
in
reasonable
detail
and
that
the
charter
school’s
5
board
of
directors
may
request
in
writing
a
hearing
before
the
6
state
board
within
fifteen
business
days
of
receiving
notice
7
of
nonrenewal
or
termination
of
the
contract.
Failure
by
the
8
board
of
directors
to
make
a
written
request
for
a
hearing
9
within
the
time
specified
shall
be
treated
as
acquiescence
to
10
the
proposed
action.
Upon
receiving
a
timely
written
request
11
for
a
hearing,
the
state
board
shall
give
ten
business
days’
12
notice
to
the
charter
school’s
board
of
directors
of
the
13
hearing
date.
The
state
board
shall
conduct
the
hearing
before
14
taking
final
action.
The
state
board
shall
take
final
action
15
to
renew
or
not
renew
a
contract
no
later
than
twenty
business
16
days
before
the
proposed
date
for
terminating
the
contract
or
17
the
end
date
of
the
contract.
18
3.
A
charter
school
contract
entered
into
with
the
state
19
board
may
be
terminated
or
not
renewed
by
the
state
board
upon
20
any
of
the
following
grounds:
21
a.
Failure
to
meet
the
requirements
for
student
performance
22
contained
in
the
contract.
23
b.
Failure
to
meet
generally
accepted
standards
of
fiscal
24
management.
25
c.
Violations
of
law.
26
d.
Other
good
cause
shown,
including
but
not
limited
to
27
the
existence
of
one
or
more
other
grounds
for
revocation
as
28
specified
in
the
contract.
29
4.
If
a
contract
is
terminated
or
not
renewed
on
grounds
30
specified
in
subsection
3,
the
school
shall
be
dissolved
31
according
to
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board,
and
the
assets
32
of
the
charter
school
shall
be
disposed
of
according
to
the
33
applicable
provisions
of
chapter
504.
34
5.
The
state
board,
after
providing
reasonable
notice
to
the
35
-113-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
113/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
school,
and
after
providing
an
1
opportunity
for
a
public
hearing,
may
terminate
the
existing
2
contract
with
the
charter
school
board
if
the
charter
school
3
has
a
history
of
the
following:
4
a.
Failure
to
meet
student
performance
requirements
5
consistent
with
state
law.
6
b.
Financial
mismanagement
or
gross
failure
to
meet
7
generally
accepted
standards
of
fiscal
management.
8
c.
Violations
of
the
law.
9
Sec.
170.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.16
Student
enrollment
upon
10
nonrenewal
or
termination
of
charter
school
contract.
11
If
a
contract
is
not
renewed
or
is
terminated
according
to
12
section
256F.15,
a
student
who
attended
the
charter
school
13
may
enroll
in
the
district
of
residence
or
may
submit
an
14
application
to
a
nonresident
district
according
to
section
15
282.18
at
any
time,
and
shall
be
determined
to
have
shown
“good
16
cause”
for
purposes
of
section
282.18.
Applications
and
notices
17
required
by
section
282.18
shall
be
processed
and
provided
18
in
a
prompt
manner.
The
application
and
notice
deadlines
in
19
section
282.18
do
not
apply
under
these
circumstances.
The
20
charter
school
shall
transfer
the
student’s
educational
records
21
within
ten
business
days
of
the
charter
school’s
closure
to
the
22
student’s
school
district
of
enrollment.
23
Sec.
171.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.17
Extent
of
specific
legal
24
authority.
25
1.
A
charter
school
board
may
sue
and
be
sued.
26
2.
A
charter
school
board
shall
not
levy
taxes
or
issue
27
bonds.
28
3.
A
charter
school
is
a
municipality
for
purposes
of
29
chapter
670.
30
Sec.
172.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.18
Funding.
31
A
student
enrolled
in
a
charter
school
shall
be
counted,
32
for
state
school
foundation
aid
purposes,
in
the
student’s
33
district
of
residence.
A
student’s
residence,
for
purposes
34
of
this
section,
means
a
residence
under
section
282.1.
The
35
-114-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
114/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
board
of
directors
of
the
district
of
residence
shall
pay
to
1
the
charter
school
the
district
cost
per
pupil,
the
teacher
2
salary
supplement
district
cost
per
pupil,
the
professional
3
development
supplement
district
cost
per
pupil,
and
the
early
4
intervention
supplement
district
cost
per
pupil
under
section
5
257.10,
plus
any
moneys
received
for
the
student
as
a
result
6
of
the
non-English
speaking
weighting
under
section
280.4,
7
subsection
3,
for
the
previous
school
year
multiplied
by
the
8
district
cost
per
pupil
for
the
previous
year.
In
addition,
9
the
board
of
directors
of
the
district
of
residence
shall
pay
10
to
the
charter
school
any
other
per
pupil
moneys
requested
11
under
the
charter
school
application
approved
by
the
state
12
board.
13
Sec.
173.
NEW
SECTION
.
256F.19
Prior
charter
schools
and
14
innovation
zones.
15
1.
A
charter
school
or
innovation
zone
school
established
16
prior
to
July
1,
2012,
shall
continue
to
be
governed
by
chapter
17
256F,
Code
2011
and
Code
Supplement
2011,
until
the
term
of
the
18
contract
entered
into
pursuant
to
section
256F.8,
Code
2011,
19
ends.
20
2.
This
section
is
repealed
July
1,
2018.
21
Sec.
174.
Section
282.18,
subsection
4,
paragraph
b,
Code
22
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
23
b.
For
purposes
of
this
section
,
“good
cause”
means
a
change
24
in
a
child’s
residence
due
to
a
change
in
family
residence,
a
25
change
in
the
state
in
which
the
family
residence
is
located,
26
a
change
in
a
child’s
parents’
marital
status,
a
guardianship
27
or
custody
proceeding,
placement
in
foster
care,
adoption,
28
participation
in
a
foreign
exchange
program,
or
participation
29
in
a
substance
abuse
or
mental
health
treatment
program,
a
30
change
in
the
status
of
a
child’s
resident
district
such
as
31
removal
of
accreditation
by
the
state
board,
surrender
of
32
accreditation,
or
permanent
closure
of
a
nonpublic
school,
33
revocation
nonrenewal
or
termination
of
a
charter
school
34
contract
as
provided
in
section
256F.8
256F.15
,
the
failure
35
-115-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
115/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
of
negotiations
for
a
whole
grade
sharing,
reorganization,
1
dissolution
agreement
or
the
rejection
of
a
current
whole
grade
2
sharing
agreement,
or
reorganization
plan.
If
the
good
cause
3
relates
to
a
change
in
status
of
a
child’s
school
district
of
4
residence,
however,
action
by
a
parent
or
guardian
must
be
5
taken
to
file
the
notification
within
forty-five
days
of
the
6
last
board
action
or
within
thirty
days
of
the
certification
of
7
the
election,
whichever
is
applicable
to
the
circumstances.
8
Sec.
175.
Section
670.1,
subsection
2,
Code
2011,
is
amended
9
to
read
as
follows:
10
2.
“Municipality”
means
city,
county,
township,
school
11
district,
charter
school,
and
any
other
unit
of
local
12
government
except
soil
and
water
conservation
districts
as
13
defined
in
section
161A.3,
subsection
6
.
14
Sec.
176.
REPEAL.
Section
256F.7,
Code
2011,
is
repealed.
15
DIVISION
XVI
16
THIRD
GRADE
LITERACY
17
Sec.
177.
Section
256.7,
Code
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
by
18
adding
the
following
new
subsection:
19
NEW
SUBSECTION
.
31.
By
July
1,
2013,
adopt
by
rule
20
guidelines
for
school
district
implementation
of
section
21
279.68,
including
but
not
limited
to
basic
levels
of
reading
22
proficiency
on
approved
assessments
and
identification
of
tools
23
that
school
districts
may
use
in
evaluating
and
reevaluating
24
any
student
who
may
be
or
who
is
determined
to
be
deficient
in
25
reading,
including
but
not
limited
to
initial
assessments
and
26
subsequent
assessments,
alternative
assessments,
and
portfolio
27
reviews.
The
state
board
shall
adopt
standards
that
provide
28
a
reasonable
expectation
that
a
student’s
progress
toward
29
reading
proficiency
under
section
279.68
is
sufficient
to
30
master
appropriate
grade
four
level
reading
skills
prior
to
the
31
student’s
promotion
to
grade
four.
32
Sec.
178.
Section
256.9,
subsection
53,
paragraph
a,
Code
33
Supplement
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
follows:
34
a.
Develop
and
distribute,
or
approve,
in
collaboration
35
-116-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
116/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
with
the
area
education
agencies,
core
curriculum
technical
1
assistance
and
implementation
strategies
that
school
districts
2
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
shall
utilize,
including
but
3
not
limited
to
the
development
and
delivery
of
formative
and
4
end-of-course
model
assessments
classroom
teachers
may
use
5
to
measure
student
progress
on
the
core
curriculum
adopted
6
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
26
.
The
department
7
shall,
in
collaboration
with
the
advisory
group
convened
in
8
accordance
with
paragraph
“b”
and
educational
assessment
9
providers,
identify
and
make
available
to
school
districts
10
end-of-course
and
additional
model
end-of-course
and
additional
11
assessments
to
align
with
the
expectations
included
in
the
Iowa
12
core
curriculum.
The
model
assessments
shall
be
suitable
to
13
meet
the
multiple
assessment
measures
requirement
specified
in
14
section
256.7,
subsection
21
,
paragraph
“c”
.
15
Sec.
179.
Section
256.9,
subsection
53,
Code
Supplement
16
2011,
is
amended
by
adding
the
following
new
paragraphs:
17
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
c.
Identify
the
scoring
levels
on
approved
18
grade
three
reading
assessments
that
require
the
retention
of
a
19
student
pursuant
to
section
279.68,
and
develop
or
identify
and
20
approve
alternative
performance
measures
for
students
who
are
21
not
proficient
in
reading
in
accordance
with
section
279.68,
22
subsection
2.
Alternative
performance
measures
approved
23
pursuant
to
this
paragraph
shall
include
but
not
be
limited
to
24
a
demonstration
of
reading
mastery
evidenced
by
portfolios
of
25
student
work.
26
NEW
PARAGRAPH
.
d.
Establish,
subject
to
an
appropriation
27
of
sufficient
funds
by
the
general
assembly,
an
Iowa
reading
28
research
center
to
apply
current
research
on
literacy
to
29
provide
for
the
development
and
dissemination
of
all
of
the
30
following:
31
(1)
Promising
instructional
strategies
in
reading.
32
(2)
Reading
assessments.
33
(3)
Professional
development
strategies
and
materials
34
aligned
with
current
and
emerging
best
practices
for
the
35
-117-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
117/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
teaching
of
reading.
1
Sec.
180.
Section
256D.2A,
Code
2011,
is
amended
to
read
as
2
follows:
3
256D.2A
Program
funding.
4
For
the
budget
year
beginning
July
1,
2009,
and
each
5
succeeding
budget
year,
a
school
district
shall
expend
funds
6
received
pursuant
to
section
257.10,
subsection
11
,
at
the
7
kindergarten
through
grade
three
levels
to
reduce
class
sizes
8
to
the
state
goal
of
seventeen
students
for
every
one
teacher
9
and
to
achieve
a
higher
level
of
student
success
in
the
10
basic
skills,
especially
reading
;
and
to
establish
a
reading
11
enhancement
and
acceleration
development
initiative
pursuant
12
to
section
279.68,
subsection
3,
paragraph
“f”
.
In
order
to
13
support
these
efforts,
school
districts
shall
expend
funds
14
received
pursuant
to
section
257.10,
subsection
11,
as
provided
15
in
section
279.68,
subsection
3,
paragraph
“f”
,
and
may
expend
16
funds
received
pursuant
to
section
257.10,
subsection
11
,
17
at
the
kindergarten
through
grade
three
level
on
programs,
18
instructional
support,
and
materials
that
include
but
are
not
19
limited
to
the
following:
additional
licensed
instructional
20
staff;
additional
support
for
students,
such
as
before
and
21
after
school
programs,
tutoring,
and
intensive
summer
programs;
22
the
acquisition
and
administration
of
diagnostic
reading
23
assessments;
the
implementation
of
research-based
instructional
24
intervention
programs
for
students
needing
additional
support;
25
the
implementation
of
all-day,
everyday
kindergarten
programs;
26
and
the
provision
of
classroom
teachers
with
intensive
training
27
programs
to
improve
reading
instruction
and
professional
28
development
in
best
practices
including
but
not
limited
to
29
training
programs
related
to
instruction
to
increase
students’
30
phonemic
awareness,
reading
abilities,
and
comprehension
31
skills.
32
Sec.
181.
NEW
SECTION
.
279.68
Student
progression
and
33
retention
——
remedial
instruction
——
reporting
requirements.
34
1.
Reading
deficiency
and
parental
notification.
35
-118-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
118/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
a.
A
school
district
shall
provide
intensive
reading
1
instruction
to
any
student
who
exhibits
a
substantial
2
deficiency
in
reading,
based
upon
locally
determined
or
3
statewide
assessments
conducted
in
kindergarten
or
grade
one,
4
grade
two,
or
grade
three,
or
through
teacher
observations,
5
immediately
following
the
identification
of
the
reading
6
deficiency.
The
student’s
reading
proficiency
shall
be
7
reassessed
by
locally
determined
and
statewide
assessments.
8
The
student
shall
continue
to
be
provided
with
intensive
9
reading
instruction
until
the
reading
deficiency
is
remedied.
10
b.
The
parent
or
guardian
of
any
student
in
kindergarten
11
through
grade
three
who
exhibits
a
substantial
deficiency
in
12
reading,
as
described
in
paragraph
“a”
,
shall
be
notified
at
13
least
annually
in
writing
of
the
following:
14
(1)
That
the
child
has
been
identified
as
having
a
15
substantial
deficiency
in
reading.
16
(2)
A
description
of
the
services
currently
provided
to
the
17
child.
18
(3)
A
description
of
the
proposed
supplemental
19
instructional
services
and
supports
that
the
school
district
20
will
provide
to
the
child
that
are
designed
to
remediate
the
21
identified
area
of
reading
deficiency.
22
(4)
That
if
the
child’s
reading
deficiency
is
not
remediated
23
by
the
end
of
grade
three,
the
child
shall
be
retained
unless
24
the
child
is
exempt
from
mandatory
retention
for
good
cause
25
pursuant
to
subsection
2,
paragraph
“b”
.
If
the
child
is
26
ineligible
for
a
good
cause
exemption,
the
notification
shall
27
state
why
the
child
is
ineligible.
28
(5)
Strategies
for
parents
and
guardians
to
use
in
helping
29
the
child
succeed
in
reading
proficiency,
including
but
not
30
limited
to
the
promotion
of
parent-guided
home
reading.
31
(6)
That
the
assessment
used
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
32
subsection
53,
is
not
the
sole
determiner
of
promotion
and
33
that
additional
evaluations,
portfolio
reviews,
performance
34
measures,
and
assessments
are
available
to
the
child
to
assist
35
-119-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
119/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
parents
and
the
school
district
in
knowing
when
a
child
is
1
reading
at
or
above
grade
level
and
ready
for
grade
promotion.
2
(7)
The
district’s
specific
criteria
and
policies
for
3
midyear
promotion.
For
purposes
of
this
section,
“midyear
4
promotion”
means
promotion
to
the
next
grade
level
of
a
retained
5
student
at
any
time
during
the
year
of
retention
once
the
6
student
has
demonstrated
the
ability
to
read
at
grade
level.
7
c.
If
the
student’s
reading
deficiency,
as
identified
in
8
paragraph
“a”
,
is
not
remedied
by
the
end
of
grade
three,
9
as
demonstrated
by
scoring
on
an
assessment
approved
by
the
10
department
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
53,
the
11
student
shall
be
retained
in
grade
three.
12
2.
Good
cause
exemption.
13
a.
The
school
district
shall
only
exempt
students
from
14
mandatory
retention,
as
provided
in
subsection
1,
paragraph
15
“c”
,
for
good
cause.
Good
cause
exemptions
shall
be
limited
to
16
the
following:
17
(1)
Limited
English
proficient
students
who
have
had
18
less
than
two
years
of
instruction
in
an
English
as
a
second
19
language
program.
20
(2)
Students
requiring
special
education
whose
21
individualized
education
program
indicates
that
participation
22
in
the
assessment
approved
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
23
subsection
53,
is
not
appropriate,
consistent
with
the
24
requirements
of
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
of
education
25
for
the
administration
of
chapter
256B.
26
(3)
Students
who
demonstrate
an
acceptable
level
of
27
performance
on
an
alternative
performance
measure
approved
by
28
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
pursuant
to
section
29
256.9,
subsection
53.
30
(4)
Students
who
demonstrate
mastery
through
a
student
31
portfolio
under
alternative
performance
measures
approved
32
pursuant
to
section
256.9,
subsection
53.
33
(5)
Students
who
have
received
intensive
remediation
34
in
reading
for
two
or
more
years
but
still
demonstrate
a
35
-120-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
120/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
deficiency
in
reading
and
who
were
previously
retained
in
1
kindergarten,
grade
one,
grade
two,
or
grade
three.
Intensive
2
reading
instruction
for
students
so
promoted
must
include
3
an
altered
instructional
day
that
includes
specialized
4
diagnostic
information
and
specific
reading
strategies
for
5
each
student.
The
school
district
shall
assist
attendance
6
centers
and
teachers
to
implement
reading
strategies
that
7
research
has
shown
to
be
successful
in
improving
reading
among
8
low-performing
readers.
9
b.
Requests
for
good
cause
exemptions
from
the
mandatory
10
retention
requirement
for
students
as
described
in
paragraph
11
“a”
,
subparagraphs
(3)
and
(4),
shall
be
made
consistent
with
12
the
following:
13
(1)
Documentation
shall
be
submitted
from
the
student’s
14
teacher
to
the
school
principal
that
indicates
that
the
15
promotion
of
the
student
is
appropriate
and
is
based
upon
the
16
student’s
academic
record.
Such
documentation
shall
include
17
but
not
be
limited
to
the
individualized
education
program,
if
18
applicable,
report
card,
or
student
portfolio.
19
(2)
The
school
principal
shall
review
and
discuss
the
20
recommendation
submitted
pursuant
to
subparagraph
(1)
with
21
the
teacher
and
the
school
principal
shall
determine
whether
22
the
student
should
be
promoted
or
retained.
If
the
principal
23
determines
that
the
student
should
be
retained,
the
principal
24
shall
notify
the
student’s
teacher
and
parent
or
guardian
of
25
the
decision
in
writing
and
the
student
shall
be
ineligible
for
26
the
good
cause
exemption
from
mandatory
retention.
27
(3)
If
the
school
principal
determines
that
the
28
student
should
be
promoted,
the
school
principal
shall
29
make
such
recommendation
in
writing
to
the
district
school
30
superintendent.
The
district
school
superintendent
shall
31
accept
or
reject
the
school
principal’s
recommendation
and
32
shall
notify
the
school
principal
and
the
student’s
teacher
33
and
parent
or
guardian
of
the
school
superintendent’s
decision
34
in
writing.
If
the
school
superintendent
determines
that
the
35
-121-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
121/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
student
should
be
retained,
the
student
shall
be
ineligible
for
1
the
good
cause
exemption
from
mandatory
retention.
The
parent
2
or
guardian
of
the
student
may
appeal
the
superintendent’s
3
decision
to
the
board
of
directors
of
the
school
district.
4
If
the
superintendent’s
decision
is
affirmed
by
the
school
5
board,
the
decision
is
final
and
is
not
subject
to
appeal
under
6
section
290.1.
7
c.
This
section
does
not
preclude
the
parent
or
guardian
of
8
a
student
with
a
reading
deficiency
from
requesting
that
the
9
student
be
retained
at
grade
level.
10
3.
Successful
progression
for
retained
readers.
A
school
11
district
shall
do
all
of
the
following:
12
a.
Conduct
a
review,
within
one
week
following
the
last
13
instructional
day
of
the
school
calendar,
of
student
progress
14
for
any
student
retained
under
subsection
1,
paragraph
“c”
,
who
15
did
not
meet
the
criteria
for
one
of
the
good
cause
exemptions
16
in
subsection
2,
paragraph
“a”
.
The
review
shall
address
17
additional
supports
and
services,
as
described
in
subparagraph
18
(2),
needed
to
remediate
the
identified
areas
of
reading
19
deficiency.
The
school
district
shall
require
a
student
20
portfolio
to
be
completed
for
each
such
student.
21
b.
Provide
students
who
are
retained
under
subsection
22
1,
paragraph
“c”
,
with
intensive
instructional
services
23
and
supports,
free
of
charge,
to
remediate
the
identified
24
areas
of
reading
deficiency,
including
a
minimum
of
a
daily
25
ninety-minute
block
of
scientific-research-based
reading
26
instruction
and
other
strategies
prescribed
by
the
school
27
district
which
may
include
but
are
not
limited
to
the
28
following:
29
(1)
Small
group
instruction.
30
(2)
Reduced
teacher-student
ratios.
31
(3)
More
frequent
progress
monitoring.
32
(4)
Tutoring
or
mentoring.
33
(5)
Transition
classes
containing
students
in
grades
three
34
and
four.
35
-122-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
122/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
(6)
Extended
school
day,
week,
or
year.
1
(7)
Summer
reading
programs.
2
c.
At
regular
intervals,
apprise
the
parent
or
guardian
of
3
academic
and
other
progress
being
made
by
the
student
and
give
4
the
parent
or
guardian
other
useful
information.
5
d.
Implement
a
policy
for
the
midyear
promotion
of
any
6
student
retained
under
subsection
1,
paragraph
“c”
,
who
can
7
demonstrate
that
the
student
is
a
successful
and
independent
8
reader,
reading
at
or
above
grade
level,
and
ready
to
be
9
promoted
to
grade
four.
Tools
that
school
districts
may
use
10
in
reevaluating
any
student
retained
may
include
subsequent
11
assessments,
alternative
assessments,
and
portfolio
reviews,
12
identified
by
rule
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
31.
13
Students
promoted
during
the
school
year
after
November
1
shall
14
demonstrate
proficiency
pursuant
to
guidelines
adopted
by
rule
15
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
31.
16
e.
In
addition
to
required
reading
enhancement
and
17
acceleration
strategies,
provide
parents
of
students
who
are
18
retained
under
subsection
1,
paragraph
“c”
,
with
a
plan
outlined
19
in
a
parental
contract,
including
participation
in
regular
20
parent-guided
home
reading.
21
f.
Establish,
using
funds
received
pursuant
to
section
22
257.10,
subsection
11,
a
reading
enhancement
and
acceleration
23
development
initiative
designed
to
prevent
the
retention
of
24
grade
three
students
and
to
offer
intensive
accelerated
reading
25
instruction
to
grade
three
students
who
fail
to
meet
standards
26
for
promotion
to
grade
four
and
to
each
kindergarten
through
27
grade
three
student
who
is
assessed
as
exhibiting
a
reading
28
deficiency.
The
initiative
shall
comply
with
all
of
the
29
following
criteria:
30
(1)
Be
provided
to
all
kindergarten
through
grade
three
31
students
at
risk
of
retention
under
this
section.
The
32
assessment
initiative
shall
measure
phonemic
awareness,
33
phonics,
fluency,
vocabulary,
and
comprehension.
34
(2)
Be
provided
during
regular
school
hours
in
addition
to
35
-123-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
123/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
the
regular
reading
instruction.
1
(3)
Provide
a
reading
curriculum
that
meets
guidelines
2
adopted
pursuant
to
section
256.7,
subsection
31,
and
at
a
3
minimum
has
the
following
specifications:
4
(a)
Assists
students
assessed
as
exhibiting
a
reading
5
deficiency
in
developing
the
ability
to
read
at
grade
level.
6
(b)
Provides
skill
development
in
phonemic
awareness,
7
phonics,
fluency,
vocabulary,
and
comprehension.
8
(c)
Includes
a
scientifically
based
and
reliable
9
assessment.
10
(d)
Provides
initial
and
ongoing
analysis
of
each
student’s
11
reading
progress.
12
(e)
Is
implemented
during
regular
school
hours.
13
(f)
Provides
a
curriculum
in
core
academic
subjects
to
14
assist
the
student
in
maintaining
or
meeting
proficiency
levels
15
for
the
appropriate
grade
in
all
academic
subjects.
16
g.
Report
to
the
department
of
education
the
specific
17
intensive
reading
interventions
and
supports
implemented
by
the
18
school
district
pursuant
to
this
section.
The
department
shall
19
annually
prescribe
the
components
of
required
or
requested
20
reports,
including
but
not
limited
to
a
report
on
the
number
of
21
students
retained
under
this
section.
22
h.
Provide
a
student
who
has
been
retained
in
grade
three
23
and
who
has
received
intensive
instructional
services
but
is
24
still
not
ready
for
grade
promotion,
as
determined
by
the
25
school
district,
the
option
of
being
placed
in
a
transitional
26
instructional
setting.
Such
setting
shall
specifically
be
27
designed
to
produce
learning
gains
sufficient
to
meet
grade
28
four
performance
standards
while
continuing
to
remediate
the
29
areas
of
reading
deficiency.
30
DIVISION
XVII
31
STATE
MANDATE
32
Sec.
182.
STATE
MANDATE
FUNDING
SPECIFIED.
In
accordance
33
with
section
25B.2,
subsection
3,
the
state
cost
of
requiring
34
compliance
with
any
state
mandate
included
in
this
Act
shall
35
-124-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
124/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
be
paid
by
a
school
district
from
state
school
foundation
aid
1
received
by
the
school
district
under
section
257.16.
This
2
specification
of
the
payment
of
the
state
cost
shall
be
deemed
3
to
meet
all
of
the
state
funding-related
requirements
of
4
section
25B.2,
subsection
3,
and
no
additional
state
funding
5
shall
be
necessary
for
the
full
implementation
of
this
Act
6
by
and
enforcement
of
this
Act
against
all
affected
school
7
districts.
8
EXPLANATION
9
This
bill
relates
to
programs
and
activities
under
10
the
purview
of
the
department
of
education,
the
board
of
11
educational
examiners,
school
districts,
and
accredited
12
nonpublic
schools.
13
DIVISION
I
——
COMPETENCY-BASED
INSTRUCTION.
2011
Iowa
Acts,
14
chapter
71
(SF
453),
directs
the
state
board
of
education
to
15
adopt
rules
requiring
public
and
accredited
nonpublic
high
16
schools
to
consider
any
student
who
satisfactorily
completes
a
17
high
school-level
unit
to
have
satisfactorily
completed
a
unit
18
of
the
high
school
graduation
requirements
for
that
subject
19
matter
area
and
to
issue
high
school
credit
for
the
unit
to
20
the
student.
This
requirement
is
limited
to
the
subjects
of
21
English
or
language
arts,
mathematics,
science,
or
social
22
studies.
The
bill
removes
that
limitation.
23
The
bill
permits
a
school
district
or
accredited
nonpublic
24
school
to
allow
high
school
credit
to
be
awarded
to
a
student
25
upon
the
demonstration
of
required
competencies
for
a
course
or
26
content
area,
as
approved
by
an
appropriately
licensed
teacher.
27
The
bill
specifies
that
the
school
district
or
accredited
28
nonpublic
school
determines
the
assessment
methods
by
which
29
the
student
demonstrates
sufficient
evidence
of
the
required
30
competencies.
31
The
bill
defines
“unit”
for
the
purposes
of
course
32
requirements
for
students
in
public
and
nonpublic
schools
in
33
grades
9
through
12.
To
qualify
as
a
unit,
a
course
must
be
34
taught
for
at
least
200
minutes
per
week
for
36
weeks
or
be
35
-125-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
125/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
taught
for
the
equivalent
of
120
hours
of
instruction.
1
The
bill
provides
that
a
student
will
receive
credit
or
2
partial
credit
upon
successful
completion
of
a
course
which
3
meets
one
of
the
criteria
for
“unit”
as
defined
in
the
bill
4
or
related
components
equivalent
to
a
course
which
meets
one
5
of
the
criteria.
Partial
credit
must
be
calculated
in
a
6
manner
consistent
with
the
criteria
set
out
in
the
bill.
The
7
bill
further
provides
that
a
student
may
receive
credit
on
a
8
performance
basis
through
the
administration
of
an
assessment,
9
provided
the
assessment
covers
the
competencies
ordinarily
10
included
in
the
regular
course.
11
DIVISION
II
——
CORE
CURRICULUM.
The
bill
establishes
12
the
core
curriculum
advisory
council
under
the
department
of
13
education.
Upon
request
by
the
director
of
the
department
of
14
education,
the
council
is
to
make
nonbinding
recommendations
15
to
the
director
regarding
necessary
changes
to
the
core
16
curriculum.
The
council
is
directed
to
seek
to
further
the
17
goals
of
the
core
curriculum
and
any
objectives
established
by
18
the
director
in
making
recommendations.
The
council
consists
19
of
no
less
than
seven
members
appointed
by
and
serving
at
the
20
pleasure
of
the
director.
The
council
must
be
balanced
by
21
gender
and
political
party.
The
council
is
to
meet
at
least
22
quarterly
and
at
the
call
of
the
chair
of
the
council.
Members
23
of
the
council
serve
without
compensation
but
may
be
reimbursed
24
for
their
actual
expenses
incurred
in
the
performance
of
their
25
duties.
26
The
bill
adds
the
subjects
of
music
and
other
fine
arts,
27
applied
arts,
foreign
languages,
physical
education,
character
28
education,
and
entrepreneurship
education
to
the
skills
and
29
knowledge
the
core
curriculum
for
kindergarten
through
grade
12
30
must
address.
31
The
director
must
create
and
disseminate
to
school
32
districts,
charter
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
a
33
model
curriculum
that
is
directly
tied
to
the
goals,
outcomes,
34
and
assessment
strategies
identified
in
the
core
content
35
-126-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
126/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
standards.
The
model
curriculum
shall
provide
guidance
to
1
school
districts
and
schools
and
expand
on
the
core
content
2
standards.
The
model
curriculum
shall
be
modified
as
necessary
3
to
incorporate
the
core
curriculum
framework.
4
DIVISION
III
——
PARENT
ADVOCACY
NETWORK.
The
bill
requires
5
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
to
establish
a
6
statewide
parent
advocacy
network
to
create
an
integrated,
7
accessible
set
of
community-wide
resources
to
support
learning
8
and
development
by
July
1,
2013.
The
bill
provides
that
the
9
statewide
parent
advocacy
network
shall
include
at
least
one
10
parent
representative
from
each
school
district
in
the
state.
11
The
bill
requires
the
director
to
coordinate
with
the
board
12
of
directors
of
each
public
school
district
to
facilitate
the
13
establishment
and
maintenance
of
the
statewide
parent
advocacy
14
network.
The
bill
directs
the
board
of
directors
of
each
15
public
school
district
to
assist
the
director
in
identifying
at
16
least
one
representative
from
each
school
district
in
the
state
17
to
serve
on
the
statewide
parent
advocacy
network.
18
DIVISION
IV
——
TEACHER
AND
ADMINISTRATOR
PERFORMANCE.
The
19
bill
directs
the
state
board
to
adopt
new
Iowa
teaching
and
20
administration
standards
by
January
1,
2013,
and
to
implement
21
statewide
teacher
and
administrator
evaluation
system
pilot
22
programs
during
the
2013-2014
school
year;
provides
for
23
the
appointment
of
a
teacher
performance,
compensation,
and
24
career
development
task
force
to
develop
recommendations
for
25
a
new
teacher
compensation
system;
directs
the
director
of
26
the
department
of
education
to
develop
a
statewide
teacher
27
evaluation
system
and
a
statewide
administrator
evaluation
28
system
that
school
districts,
charter
schools,
and
accredited
29
nonpublic
schools
shall
use
to
standardize
the
instruments
30
and
processes
used
to
evaluate
teachers
and
administrators
31
throughout
the
state;
provides
for
the
creation
of
a
task
force
32
to
conduct
a
study
regarding
a
statewide
teacher
evaluation
33
system
and
a
statewide
administrator
evaluation
system;
and
34
requires
that
public
school
teachers
and
administrators
be
35
-127-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
127/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
evaluated
annually
rather
than
every
three
years,
and
that
the
1
evaluation
of
a
teacher
be
conducted
by
at
least
one
person
who
2
holds
a
valid
certification
issued
for
successfully
completing
3
an
evaluator
training
program.
4
The
bill
sets
out
the
minimum
components
of
the
statewide
5
teacher
evaluation
system,
including
direct
observation
of
6
classroom
teaching
behaviors,
strong
consideration
of
student
7
outcome
measures,
integration
of
the
Iowa
teaching
standards,
8
and
system
applicability
to
teachers
in
all
content
areas
9
taught
by
a
school.
The
bill
allows
school
districts
to
10
implement
an
alternative
teacher
or
administrator
evaluation
11
system
if
the
department
approves
the
alternative
system.
12
The
director
is
tasked
with
appointing
members
to,
and
13
providing
staffing
for,
the
teacher
performance,
compensation,
14
and
career
development
task
force,
including
members
15
representing
teachers,
parents,
school
administrators,
and
16
business
and
community
leaders.
The
task
force
is
directed
to
17
address
the
duties
and
responsibilities
of
apprentice,
career,
18
mentor,
and
master
teachers;
utilizing
retired
teachers
as
19
mentors;
uses
and
realignment
of
finite
resources;
mechanisms
20
to
substantially
increase
the
average
salary
of
teachers
who
21
assume
leadership
roles;
and
standardizing
implementation
of
22
task
force
recommendations
in
all
of
Iowa’s
school
districts
23
and
public
charter
schools.
The
task
force
must
submit
its
24
findings
and
recommendations
in
a
report
to
the
state
board
of
25
education,
the
governor,
and
the
general
assembly
by
October
26
15,
2012.
27
The
statewide
educator
evaluation
system
task
force
28
must
submit
its
findings,
recommendations,
and
a
proposal
29
for
a
statewide
teacher
evaluation
system
and
a
statewide
30
administrator
evaluation
system
to
the
state
board
of
31
education
by
October
15,
2012.
The
task
force
must
include
32
a
tiered
evaluation
system
differentiating
levels
of
teacher
33
effectiveness
in
its
recommendations
and
proposal.
34
The
provisions
providing
for
appointment
of
the
task
forces
35
-128-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
128/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
take
effect
upon
enactment.
1
The
bill
repeals
the
current
Iowa
teaching
standards
on
2
July
1,
2013.
The
bill
also
repeals
a
Code
provision
that
3
established
a
career
ladder
pilot
program
to
be
administered
4
by
the
department
of
education
from
2007
through
2009.
The
5
final
report
on
the
pilot
program
was
submitted
to
the
general
6
assembly
in
March
2010.
7
The
bill
makes
a
technical
correction
to
a
reference
8
relating
to
transfer
of
the
duties
of
certain
licensing
9
responsibilities
to
the
state
board
of
education
and
department
10
of
education
under
division
X
of
this
bill.
11
DIVISION
V
——
INNOVATION
ACCELERATION
PROGRAM
——
FUND.
The
12
bill
establishes
an
innovation
acceleration
program
in
the
13
department
of
education
and
creates
an
innovation
acceleration
14
fund
in
the
state
treasury
under
the
control
of
the
department.
15
The
purpose
of
the
innovation
acceleration
program
is
to
16
provide
competitive
grants
to
applicants
with
a
record
of
17
improving
student
achievement
and
educational
attainment
in
18
order
to
expand
the
implementation
of,
and
investment
in,
19
innovative
practices
that
are
demonstrated
to
have
an
impact
20
on
improving
student
achievement
or
student
growth,
closing
21
achievement
gaps,
decreasing
dropout
rates,
increasing
parental
22
involvement,
increasing
attendance
rates,
increasing
high
23
school
graduation
rates,
or
increasing
college
enrollment
and
24
completion
rates.
25
The
program
shall
be
designed
to
enable
grantees
to
expand
26
and
develop
innovative
practices
that
can
serve
as
models
of
27
best
practices,
work
in
partnership
with
the
private
sector
and
28
the
philanthropic
community,
and
identify
and
document
best
29
practices
that
can
be
shared
and
expanded
based
on
demonstrated
30
success.
31
The
innovation
acceleration
fund
shall
be
administered
32
by
the
director
of
education
and
shall
consist
of
moneys
33
appropriated
by
the
general
assembly
and
any
other
moneys
34
available
to
and
obtained
or
accepted
by
the
department
for
the
35
-129-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
129/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
program.
1
DIVISION
VI
——
ONLINE
LEARNING.
The
bill
relates
to
the
2
development,
establishment,
and
approval
of
high-quality
online
3
learning
programs
delivered
online
by
school
districts,
charter
4
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools.
5
The
bill
eliminates
a
provision
that
requires
the
state
6
board
of
education
to
adopt
rules
prohibiting
the
use
of
7
telecommunications
by
school
districts
as
the
exclusive
8
means
to
provide
any
course
which
is
required
by
the
minimum
9
educational
standards
for
accreditation,
and
replaces
it
with
a
10
provision
directing
the
state
board
to
adopt
rules
providing
11
for
the
establishment
of
an
online
learning
program
model.
12
The
director
of
the
department
is
tasked
with
developing
and
13
establishing
the
model.
14
The
director
is
authorized
to
waive
certain
standards
for
15
school
districts,
charter
schools,
and
accredited
nonpublic
16
schools
that
implement
an
online
learning
program
aligned
17
with
the
program
model.
The
standards
that
may
be
waived
18
include
the
180-day
school
calendar
requirement;
the
minimum
19
number
of
instructional
hours
required
for
a
school
day;
any
20
statutory
requirement
that
students
be
physically
present
in
21
a
school
building
and
under
the
guidance
and
instruction
of
22
the
instructional
professional
staff
employed
by
the
school
23
district
or
the
school
except
as
established
by
rule
for
the
24
online
learning
program
model;
and
any
statutory
requirement
25
that
a
subject
being
studied
by
a
student
enrolled
in
an
26
approved
online
learning
program
be
a
subject
that
is
offered
27
and
taught
by
the
professional
staff
of
the
school
district
or
28
school.
29
The
director
shall
require
that
a
school
district
or
school
30
granted
a
waiver
must
implement
and
incorporate
into
its
31
comprehensive
school
improvement
plan
accountability
measures
32
designed
to
demonstrate
that
academic
credit
is
awarded
33
based
upon
successful
completion
of
content
or
achievement
34
of
competencies
by
students
enrolled
in
the
approved
online
35
-130-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
130/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
learning
program.
1
The
director
must
also
establish
criteria
for
school
2
districts
or
schools
to
use
when
choosing
providers
of
online
3
learning
to
meet
the
online
learning
program
requirements
4
specified
in
rule
by
the
state
board.
5
The
online
learning
program
model
established
by
the
6
director
must
provide
for
online
access
to
high-quality
7
content,
instructional
materials,
and
blended
learning;
8
education
customized
to
the
needs
of
the
student
using
online
9
content;
a
means
for
a
student
to
demonstrate
competency
in
10
completed
coursework;
high-quality
online
instruction
taught
by
11
appropriately
licensed
teachers;
online
content
and
instruction
12
evaluated
on
student
learning
outcomes;
use
of
funds
available
13
for
program
implementation
and
innovation;
infrastructure
that
14
supports
online
learning;
and
online
administration
of
online
15
course
assessments.
16
At
the
discretion
of
the
school
board
or
authorities
in
17
charge
of
a
school,
after
consideration
for
circumstances
18
created
by
necessity,
convenience,
and
cost-effectiveness,
19
courses
developed
by
private
providers
may
be
utilized
by
the
20
school
district
or
school
in
implementing
an
online
learning
21
curriculum.
Courses
obtained
from
private
providers
shall
be
22
taught
by
licensed
Iowa
teachers.
23
Grades
in
online
courses
shall
be
based,
at
a
minimum,
24
on
whether
a
student
mastered
the
subject,
demonstrated
25
competency,
and
met
the
standards
established
by
the
school
26
district.
27
All
online
courses
and
programs
shall
meet
existing
28
accreditation
standards.
29
The
bill
includes
conforming
amendments.
30
DIVISION
VII
——
EDUCATIONAL
STANDARDS
EXEMPTIONS.
The
bill
31
permits
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
to
grant
32
school
districts
exemptions
from
one
or
more
of
the
educational
33
standards
for
all
grades,
from
prekindergarten
through
grade
34
12,
if
the
school
district
meets
certain
requirements
specified
35
-131-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
131/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
for
charter
schools,
including
provisions
that
require
a
1
charter
school
to
meet
all
applicable
federal,
state,
and
2
local
health
and
safety
requirements
and
laws
prohibiting
3
discrimination;
operate
as
a
nonsectarian,
nonreligious
4
public
school;
be
free
of
tuition
and
application
fees
to
Iowa
5
resident
students
between
the
ages
of
5-21
years;
be
subject
6
to
and
comply
with
Code
chapters
216
and
216A
relating
to
7
civil
and
human
rights;
provide
special
education
services;
be
8
subject
to
the
same
financial
audits,
audit
procedures,
and
9
audit
requirements
as
a
school
district;
be
subject
to
and
10
comply
with
provisions
relating
to
the
student
achievement
11
and
teacher
quality
program;
be
subject
to
and
comply
with
12
state
law
relating
to
contracts
with
and
discharge
of
teachers
13
and
administrators;
be
subject
to
and
comply
with
state
14
law
relating
to
the
transportation
of
students;
comply
with
15
state
and
federal
law
relating
to
the
suspension
or
expulsion
16
of
a
student;
comply
with
all
statutes
and
administrative
17
rules
relating
to
student
records;
submit
data
to
the
18
department
for
purposes
of
the
department’s
comprehensive
19
management
information
system;
comply
with
administrative
20
rules
relating
to
courses
or
programs
offered
online
or
use
21
of
telecommunications
as
an
instructional
tool;
and
comply
22
with
any
statewide
accountability
requirements
in
statute
23
or
administrative
rule
governing
high
school
graduation
24
requirements,
the
core
curriculum,
core
content
standards,
and
25
assessments.
26
Currently,
the
director
may
grant
school
districts
and
27
accredited
nonpublic
schools
an
exemption
from
one
or
more
of
28
the
educational
standards
for
grades
9
through
12,
including
29
but
not
limited
to
unit
requirements
for
science,
social
30
studies,
English-language
arts,
mathematics,
foreign
language,
31
vocational
service,
and
health
and
physical
education.
32
The
bill
requires
the
director
to
submit
a
report
by
February
33
1,
annually,
to
the
state
board,
the
governor,
and
the
general
34
assembly
that
lists
all
of
the
exemptions
granted
to
school
35
-132-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
132/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
and
the
reasons
for
1
which
each
exemption
was
granted.
2
The
bill
makes
a
reference
to
charter
school
requirements
3
included
in
division
XV
of
the
bill.
4
DIVISION
VIII
——
EDUCATOR
IDENTIFIER
SYSTEM
AND
EDUCATION
5
PLACEMENT
CLEARINGHOUSE.
The
bill
establishes
an
educator
6
identifier
system
and
an
education
placement
clearinghouse
7
within
the
department
of
education,
subject
to
an
appropriation
8
of
sufficient
funds
by
the
general
assembly.
9
The
bill
defines
“educator”
to
mean
a
teacher
or
principal.
10
The
educator
identifier
system
shall
be
designed
for
11
the
purpose
of
providing
information
for
studying
teacher
12
shortage
areas
and
identifying
any
possible
solutions;
studying
13
practitioner
preparation
programs,
educator
professional
14
development
programs,
and
educator
mobility
and
retention
15
issues;
improving
teaching
and
student
learning,
including
the
16
use
of
data
to
recognize,
reward,
and
develop
the
careers
of
17
individual
educators;
collecting
data
for
use
in
developing
a
18
longitudinal
data
system
that
may
be
used
with
the
educator
19
identifier
system
to
match
educators
to
students;
allowing
20
the
state
to
gather
baseline
data
about
the
distribution
of
21
highly
qualified
teachers,
including
the
number
and
percent
of
22
teachers
in
the
highest-poverty
and
lowest-poverty
schools
in
23
the
state,
and
to
take
actions
to
address
any
inequities
in
the
24
distribution
of
highly
qualified
teachers
throughout
the
state;
25
and
enabling
teachers
to
enhance
student
instruction
through
26
the
use
of
performance
and
longitudinal
growth
data.
27
Under
the
educator
identifier
system,
a
person
who
applies
28
for
or
who
holds
an
Iowa
teacher
or
administrator
license
is
29
assigned
a
unique
identifier.
30
The
unique
identifier
shall
not
use
any
personal
identifying
31
information,
such
as
social
security
numbers
or
contact
32
information,
except
for
alignment
purposes
in
data
processing.
33
The
bill
does
not
restrict
the
authority
of
a
school
34
district,
AEA,
or
charter
school
to
assign
individual
educators
35
-133-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
133/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
to
specific
grades,
levels,
programs,
or
schools;
direct
1
the
professional
development
of
individual
educators;
or
2
collaboratively
design
and
develop,
with
representation
from
3
the
teachers
and
principals
employed
by
the
school
district,
4
AEA,
charter
school,
alternative
compensation
plans
through
5
the
procedures
adopted
by
the
school
district,
AEA,
or
charter
6
school
for
setting
educator
compensation.
7
The
director,
after
consultation
with
practitioner
8
preparation
programs,
shall
establish
protocols
for
releasing
9
system
data
to
graduates’
respective
practitioner
preparation
10
programs
for
the
purpose
of
program
evaluation.
The
department
11
may
use
system
data
to
identify
practices
that
show
promise
of
12
improving
student
outcomes
or
educator
performance.
13
The
system
shall
comply
with
all
state
and
federal
privacy
14
laws.
Aggregate,
nonidentifying
information
obtained
from
the
15
system
shall
be
made
available
at
multiple
levels,
including
16
state,
school
district,
AEA,
charter
school,
practitioner
17
preparation
program,
nongovernmental
entity,
and
individual
18
levels,
through
varying
degrees
of
access,
as
designated
by
the
19
director.
20
The
education
placement
clearinghouse
shall
be
designed
21
and
implemented
for
the
posting
of
all
education
job
openings
22
offered
by
the
school
districts,
AEAs,
charter
schools,
and
23
accredited
nonpublic
schools
in
the
state.
Every
school
24
district,
AEA,
charter
school,
and
accredited
nonpublic
school
25
shall
submit
its
job
openings
to
the
department
for
posting
26
on
the
department’s
internet
site.
Every
educator
shall
27
apply
once
to
the
department,
indicating
the
educator’s
job
28
interests.
The
director
shall
provide
each
educator
with
an
29
option
to
update
submitted
information.
The
director
shall
30
develop
and
implement
a
screening
process
that
uses
but
is
not
31
limited
to
the
data
collected
from
the
educator
identifier
32
system
to
identify
high-quality
educators.
33
Only
applicants
who
apply
and
meet
clearinghouse
application
34
requirements
are
eligible
to
be
interviewed
for
jobs
posted
35
-134-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
134/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
on
the
department’s
internet
site.
A
school
district,
AEA,
1
charter
school,
or
accredited
nonpublic
school
can
request
2
more
information
from
the
applicant
that
was
not
collected
and
3
is
not
maintained
by
the
clearinghouse,
but
cannot
request
4
information
that
duplicates
that
which
is
in
the
clearinghouse.
5
The
bill
states
that
the
bill
language
shall
not
be
construed
6
to
discourage
school
districts,
AEAs,
charter
schools,
and
7
accredited
nonpublic
schools
from
advertising
or
otherwise
8
making
known
the
positions
available
through
the
clearinghouse.
9
The
bill
includes
references
relating
to
the
transfer
of
10
licensing
duties
to
the
state
board
of
education
and
the
11
department
of
education
under
division
X
of
the
bill.
12
DIVISION
IX
——
CLASS
SHARING
AGREEMENTS.
The
bill
13
expands
eligibility
for
the
supplementary
weighting
plan
for
14
district-to-community
college
sharing
and
concurrent
enrollment
15
programs
to
allow
a
school
district
that
collaborates
with
16
a
community
college
for
a
college-level
class
that
uses
an
17
activities-based,
project-based,
and
problem-based
learning
18
approach
and
that
is
offered
through
a
partnership
with
a
19
nationally
recognized
provider
of
rigorous
and
innovative
20
science,
technology,
engineering,
and
mathematics
curriculum
21
for
schools,
which
provider
is
exempt
from
taxation
under
22
section
501(c)(3)
of
the
Internal
Revenue
Code,
to
qualify
23
to
receive
additional
weighting
for
students
enrolled
in
the
24
class.
25
DIVISION
X
——
TRANSFER
OF
LICENSING
DUTIES.
The
bill
repeals
26
Code
chapter
272,
which
establishes
the
board
of
educational
27
examiners,
and
moves
the
majority
of
the
responsibilities
of
28
the
board
and
its
executive
director
to
the
state
board
of
29
education
and
the
director
of
the
department
of
education.
30
The
department
is
charged
with
carrying
out
programs
and
31
policies
as
determined
by
the
state
board,
and
the
duties
32
and
responsibilities
of
the
department
as
set
forth
by
the
33
director.
The
board
of
educational
examiners
is
created
to
34
hear
appeals
regarding
application,
renewal,
suspension,
35
-135-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
135/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
or
revocation
of
a
license,
certificate,
authorization,
or
1
statement
of
recognition.
2
The
bill
provides
for
the
authorization
of
individuals
3
to
act
as
school
administration
managers
who
successfully
4
complete
training
and
meet
board
standards
in
order
to
assist
5
school
principals
in
performing
noninstructional
duties.
The
6
bill
requires
the
department
to
establish
voluntary
statewide
7
training
programs
for
such
individuals.
8
The
bill
requires
the
state
board
to
provide
alternative
9
pathways
to
the
initial
teacher
license
and
initial
10
administrator
license
and
endorsement
by
rule.
The
rules
11
shall
prescribe
standards
and
procedures
for
the
approval
12
of
alternative
principal
licensing
programs
which
may
be
13
offered
in
this
state
by
designated
agencies
located
within
or
14
outside
this
state.
The
bill
also
establishes
requirements
15
for
applicants
to
the
programs,
and
requires
that
persons
16
who
utilize
the
alternative
pathways
to
licensure
must
be
17
supervised
and
mentored
by
experienced
practitioners.
18
The
bill
also
requires
the
state
board
to
adopt
rules
19
requiring
all
higher
education
institutions
providing
20
practitioner
preparation
to
require
any
candidate
for
21
admission
to
the
program
to
have
graduated
with
a
cumulative
22
postsecondary
grade
point
average
of
at
least
three
on
a
23
four-point
scale,
or
its
equivalent;
and
to
base
successful
24
completion
of
the
program
on
successful
completion
of
Praxis
25
II
examinations.
The
bill
also
increases
the
required
number
26
of
weeks
for
the
student
teaching
experience
from
12
to
15,
27
and
reduces
the
duration
of
time
during
which
a
practitioner
28
preparation
program
faculty
member
must
be
involved
in
a
29
specified
number
of
hours
of
team
teaching
activities
from
five
30
years
to
two
years.
31
The
bill
includes
transitional
provisions
relating
to
the
32
transfer
of
employees
from
the
board
to
the
department,
to
33
license
and
contract
validity,
transfer
of
funds,
enforcement
34
actions,
and
membership
on
the
initial
board
of
educational
35
-136-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
136/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
examiners
created
within
the
department.
1
The
bill
includes
a
number
of
conforming
amendments.
2
DIVISION
XI
——
SCHOOL
INSTRUCTIONAL
TIME
TASK
FORCE.
The
3
bill
charges
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
with
4
appointing
a
school
instructional
time
task
force
to
conduct
a
5
study
regarding
the
minimum
requirements
of
the
school
day
and
6
the
school
year.
7
The
school
instructional
time
task
force
shall
be
comprised
8
of
at
least
seven
members
who
shall,
at
a
minimum,
examine
9
whether
the
minimum
length
of
an
instructional
day
should
10
be
extended
and
if
so
for
whom,
whether
the
minimum
number
11
of
instructional
days
or
hours
in
a
school
year
should
be
12
increased
and
if
so
for
whom,
whether
the
minimum
numbered
of
13
instructional
days
or
hours
should
be
rearranged
for
purposes
14
of
summer
or
other
breaks
in
the
school
year,
whether
the
15
minimum
school
year
should
be
defined
by
a
number
of
days
or
16
by
a
number
of
instructional
hours,
whether
there
should
be
a
17
uniform,
statewide
start
date
for
the
school
year,
and
whether
18
resources
necessary
to
extend
the
minimum
instructional
day
19
or
the
minimum
school
year
are
justified
when
compared
to
20
competing
education
priorities.
The
task
force
shall
submit
21
its
findings
and
recommendations
in
a
report
to
the
state
board
22
of
education,
the
governor,
and
the
general
assembly
by
October
23
15,
2012.
24
DIVISION
XII
——
ASSESSMENTS.
The
bill
relates
to
25
assessments
for
children
prekindergarten
through
grade
11
and
26
requires
the
department
of
education
to
establish
and
implement
27
a
value-added
assessment
system.
28
The
bill
replaces,
in
language
directing
the
state
board
29
of
education
to
adopt
rules
requiring
that
school
districts
30
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
submit
a
comprehensive
31
school
improvement
plan
and
report
to
the
department
and
local
32
communities,
references
to
local
education
standards
and
33
achievement
progress
with
references
to
statewide
standards
34
and
assessment
measures
and
eliminates
reporting
requirements
35
-137-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
137/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
related
to
locally
established
student
learning
goals.
1
Further,
the
rules
adopted
by
the
state
board
incorporating
2
accountability
for,
and
reporting
of,
student
achievement
3
into
the
standards
and
accreditation
process
must
provide,
4
by
July
1,
2014,
for
the
establishment
by
the
department
of
5
an
accountability
system
designed
to
hold
school
districts
6
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
accountable
for
student
7
achievement.
The
accountability
system
must,
at
a
minimum,
8
define
and
measure
student
achievement,
student
growth,
9
student
achievement
gaps,
college
and
career
readiness,
10
student
well-being,
parent
satisfaction,
school
staff
working
11
conditions,
school
fiscal
responsibility,
and
graduation
and
12
attendance
rates.
13
The
state
board
must
also
adopt,
by
July
1,
2014,
a
policy
14
for
how
school
districts
shall
incorporate
end-of-course
15
assessments
into
their
graduation
requirements.
The
director
16
of
the
department
must,
by
July
1,
2014,
develop
high
school
17
end-of-course
assessments
for
core
content
standards
subject
18
areas,
which
the
school
districts
must
administer
as
an
19
integral
component
of
such
courses.
20
In
addition,
the
director
may
at
the
director’s
discretion,
21
or
shall
as
directed
by
the
state
board,
convene
a
working
22
group
to
develop
recommendations
for
the
accountability
23
system
or
redesign
of
accreditation
procedures;
a
compliance
24
monitoring
process
aligned
with
the
accountability
system;
25
targeting
support
for
school
districts
identified
as
26
needing
assistance;
identifying,
studying,
and
commending
27
high-performing
districts;
and
developing
takeover
strategies
28
for
school
districts
deemed
persistently
failing
to
meet
29
educational
system
or
student
achievement
standards.
30
The
rules
the
state
board
adopts
establishing
high
school
31
graduation
requirements
shall
also
require
administration
of
32
a
college
entrance
examination.
The
bill
requires
school
33
districts
and
accredited
nonpublic
schools
to
administer
34
to
each
student
enrolled
in
grade
11
the
college
entrance
35
-138-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
138/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
examination
to
assess
English,
reading,
mathematics,
and
1
science.
Each
school
district
and
nonpublic
school
must
2
offer
to
any
student
enrolled
in
grade
11
a
career
readiness
3
assessment
to
assess
reading
for
information,
locating
4
information,
and
applied
mathematics.
5
The
cost
of
the
college
entrance
examination
shall
be
paid
by
6
the
department
of
education
if
funds
are
made
available
to
the
7
department
for
such
purpose;
the
cost
of
the
career
readiness
8
assessments
shall
be
paid
by
the
department
if
funds
are
9
available
to
the
department
for
that
purpose;
and
the
costs
of
10
any
additional
college
entrance
examinations
taken
by
a
student
11
shall
be
the
responsibility
of
the
student.
If
funds
are
12
available
to
the
department
for
such
purpose,
the
department
13
shall
make
a
preparation
program
available
to
all
students
14
in
grade
11,
and
may
contract
for
the
necessary
assessment
15
services.
16
A
student
whose
scores
on
the
college
entrance
examination
17
indicate
a
high
degree
of
college
readiness
shall
be
counseled
18
by
the
school
district
or
school
to
enroll
in
accelerated
19
courses,
with
an
emphasis
on
advanced
placement
classes.
A
20
student
whose
scores
on
the
career
readiness
assessments
21
indicate
that
additional
assistance
is
required
in
reading
22
for
information,
locating
information,
or
applied
mathematics
23
shall
be
provided
intervention
strategies
for
accelerated
24
learning
by
the
school
district
or
school.
The
bill
provides
25
for
accommodations
for
students
with
disabilities
and
students
26
requiring
special
education
under
Code
chapter
256B.
The
27
bill
requires
a
student’s
scores
on
the
college
entrance
28
examinations
to
be
recorded
by
the
school
district
or
school
in
29
the
student’s
official
education
record.
30
The
bill
eliminates
from
the
core
content
requirements
31
language
relating
to
locally
developed
content
standards.
32
The
bill
tasks
the
director
of
the
department
of
education
33
with
requiring,
every
three
years,
a
random
sampling
of
34
students
to
take
the
international
programme
for
international
35
-139-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
139/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
student
assessment.
1
The
bill
requires
the
department
of
education
to
establish
2
and
implement
a
value-added
assessment
system
not
later
than
3
January
31,
2013,
to
provide
for
multivariate
longitudinal
4
analysis
of
annual
student
test
scores
to
determine
the
5
influence
of
a
school
district’s
educational
program
on
student
6
academic
growth
and
to
guide
school
district
improvement
7
efforts.
The
department
of
education
is
directed
to
select
a
8
value-added
assessment
system
provider,
based
on
criteria
set
9
forth
in
the
bill,
through
a
request
for
proposals
process.
10
School
districts
are
required
to
use
the
system
not
later
than
11
the
2013-2014
school
year,
but
may
request
from
the
district’s
12
area
education
agency
authorization
to
use
an
alternative
13
system.
14
The
bill
defines
“value-added
assessment”
to
mean
a
method
15
of
measuring
gains
in
student
achievement
by
conducting
a
16
statistical
analysis
of
achievement
data
that
reveals
academic
17
growth
over
time
for
students
and
groups
of
students,
such
as
18
those
in
a
grade
level
or
in
a
school.
19
The
system
provider
must
create
a
mechanism
to
collect
and
20
evaluate
data
in
a
manner
that
reliably
aligns
the
performance
21
of
the
teacher
with
the
achievement
levels
and
progress
22
of
the
teacher’s
students.
School
districts
must
report
23
teacher-to-student
alignment
data
to
the
system
provider
as
24
directed
by
the
department.
25
The
system
provider
must
provide
analysis
to
each
school
26
district
and
the
department
of
education,
and
must
also
chart
27
data,
using
criteria
set
forth
in
the
bill,
for
each
school
28
district.
29
A
school
district
must
have
complete
access
to
and
full
30
utilization
of
its
own
value-added
assessment
reports
and
31
charts.
Where
student
outcomes
measures
are
available,
32
for
tested
subjects
and
grades,
student
outcomes
measures
33
may
be
considered
by
the
district
to
validate
observational
34
evaluations.
Such
measures
which
are
a
component
of
a
35
-140-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
140/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
teacher’s
evaluation
are
not
a
public
record.
1
School
districts
shall
use
the
student
academic
growth
2
data
for
defining
student
and
district
learning
goals
and
3
professional
development
related
to
student
learning
goals
4
across
the
school
district.
5
The
department
shall
use
the
data
to
determine
school
6
improvement
and
technical
assistance
needs
of
school
districts
7
and
to
identify
school
districts
achieving
exceptional
gains.
8
The
department
is
directed
to
submit
an
annual
progress
report
9
regarding
the
use
of
student
academic
growth
information
in
the
10
school
improvement
processes
to
the
house
and
senate
education
11
committees
and
must
publish
the
progress
report
on
its
internet
12
site.
13
The
bill
also
requires
each
school
district
to
administer
a
14
kindergarten
readiness
assessment
prescribed
by
the
department
15
to
every
resident
prekindergarten
or
four-year-old
child
whose
16
parent
or
guardian
enrolls
the
child
in
the
district.
The
17
school
districts
must
also
administer
the
Iowa
assessments
to
18
grade
10
students
in
the
2012-13
and
2013-14
school
years.
19
DIVISION
XIII
——
NATIONAL
BOARD
FOR
PROFESSIONAL
TEACHING
20
STANDARDS
AWARDS.
The
bill
eliminates
the
end
dates
for
21
the
national
board
for
professional
teaching
standards
22
certification
one-time
reimbursement
awards
and
the
annual
23
awards.
The
term
of
eligibility
for
the
annual
award
is
10
24
years
or
for
the
years
in
which
the
individual
maintains
a
25
valid
certificate,
whichever
time
period
is
shorter.
26
DIVISION
XIV
——
EDUCATOR
EMPLOYMENT
AND
PROFESSIONAL
27
DEVELOPMENT
MATTERS.
The
bill
relates
to
teacher
performance,
28
compensation,
and
career
development,
professional
development
29
for
practitioners
and
state
funds
for
professional
development,
30
and
to
probationary
periods
and
due
process
for
teachers
and
31
administrators.
32
PROFESSIONAL
DEVELOPMENT
AND
TEACHER
EVALUATION.
The
state
33
board
of
education
is
directed
to
adopt
rules
providing
for
34
the
establishment
of
a
statewide
plan
for
the
professional
35
-141-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
141/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
development
of
practitioners
employed
in
Iowa’s
school
1
districts.
The
statewide
plan
shall
be
implemented
by
the
area
2
education
agencies
(AEAs),
each
of
which
must
submit
annually
3
to
the
department
of
education
a
plan
for
a
professional
4
development
program
for
the
following
fiscal
year.
The
program
5
developed
by
the
AEA
must
combine
the
professional
development
6
priorities
of
the
state
board
with
the
professional
development
7
needs
of
the
schools
and
school
districts
in
the
area.
The
8
director
of
the
department
must
approve,
amend
and
approve,
or
9
reject
each
AEA
plan.
The
director
may
grant
a
waiver
to
a
10
school
district
exempting
the
school
district
from
utilizing
11
the
AEA
plan
if
the
director
determines
that
the
school
12
district’s
plan
achieves
the
goals
of
the
statewide
plan.
13
The
department
is
tasked
with
implementing
the
statewide
14
plan
for
professional
development
established
by
the
state
15
board.
A
school
district
is
required
to
utilize
the
area
16
professional
development
plan
approved
by
the
director
unless
17
it
is
granted
a
waiver
by
the
director.
18
The
department
of
management
is
directed
to
annually
reduce
19
the
distributions
from
the
amounts
generated
by
the
total
20
professional
development
supplement
district
cost
and
the
total
21
area
education
agency
professional
development
supplement
22
district
cost
to
each
school
district
and
AEA
by
10
percent.
23
The
school
district
spending
authority
is
also
reduced
by
10
24
percent.
An
amount
equivalent
to
the
amount
of
the
reduction
25
is
appropriated
to
the
department
for
purposes
of
implementing
26
the
statewide
plan
for
the
professional
development
of
27
practitioners.
28
The
director
is
authorized
to
waive
requirements
relating
29
to
the
development
and
review
of
an
individual
teacher
30
professional
development
plan
for
a
school
district
that
31
utilizes
a
peer
review
teacher
evaluation
system
in
which
32
consulting
teachers,
in
conjunction
with
school
administrators,
33
make
formal
evaluations
of
the
school
district’s
teachers,
34
including
but
not
limited
to
each
teacher’s
professional
growth
35
-142-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
142/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
and
employment
status.
1
PROBATIONARY
PERIODS
AND
DUE
PROCESS.
The
bill
authorizes
2
school
boards,
which
by
a
majority
vote
institute
a
reduction
3
in
force,
to
not
renew
a
teacher’s
contract
based
on
teacher
4
evaluations,
licensure
and
endorsements,
the
needs
of
the
5
schools
and
students,
and,
under
certain
circumstances,
hiring
6
dates.
The
bill
repeals
a
Code
provision
authorizing
teachers
7
and
administrators
to
appeal
adjudicator
and
administrative
8
law
judge
decisions
regarding
employment
to
the
district
9
court.
The
administrative
law
judge
to
whom
an
administrator
10
may
currently
appeal
a
school
board
decision
is
replaced
by
11
an
adjudicator.
Currently,
the
administrative
law
judge
is
12
jointly
selected
by
the
board
and
the
administrator
from
a
13
list
of
five
individuals
submitted
by
the
board
of
educational
14
examiners;
under
the
bill,
the
public
employee
relations
board
15
submits
the
list.
The
bill
makes
a
number
of
conforming
16
changes.
Community
college
and
AEA
instructors,
teachers,
and
17
administrators
are
considered
teachers
and
administrators
for
18
purposes
of
the
statutory
requirements
relating
to
teacher
and
19
administrator
employment
and
are
therefore
also
affected
by
20
these
changes.
21
The
bill
strikes
language
that
permits
an
adjudicator
22
to
reverse,
modify,
or
grant
any
appropriate
relief
from
23
the
board
action
if
substantial
rights
of
the
teacher
have
24
been
prejudiced
because
the
board
action
is
unsupported
by
a
25
preponderance
of
the
competent
evidence
in
the
record
made
26
before
the
board
when
that
record
is
viewed
as
a
whole.
The
27
adjudicator’s
decision
becomes
the
final
and
binding
decision
28
of
the
school
board.
In
the
case
of
administrators,
language
29
is
also
eliminated
that
allowed
the
administrator
to
file
a
30
written
notice
of
appeal
of
the
proposed
adjudicator’s
decision
31
and
which
allowed
the
school
board
to
review
the
proposed
32
adjudicator’s
decision
on
its
own
motion.
33
The
bill
reduces
considerably
the
adjudicator
process
34
timelines
for
teachers
and
administrators.
35
-143-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
143/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
For
beginning
teachers
hired
on
or
after
July
1,
2012,
the
1
probationary
period
for
a
beginning
teacher
is
extended
from
2
three
years,
with
a
potential
for
a
one-year
extension,
to
3
five
years,
with
a
potential
for
a
one-year
extension;
and
the
4
option
for
the
probationary
teacher
to
appeal
a
board
decision
5
to
an
adjudicator
and
to
the
district
court
is
eliminated.
6
Under
the
current
Code,
nonprobationary
teachers
are
exempt
7
from
this
provision,
but
under
the
bill
if
a
teacher
does
8
not
successfully
complete
an
intensive
assistance
program
9
as
required,
a
school
board
may
place
the
teacher
back
on
10
probationary
status
for
the
school
year
following
the
year
in
11
which
the
teacher
participated
in
the
intensive
assistance
12
program.
13
DIVISION
XV
——
CHARTER
SCHOOL
CHANGES.
The
bill
rewrites
14
the
majority
of
Iowa’s
charter
school
legislation.
The
purpose
15
of
the
charter
school
legislation
remains
the
same,
as
do
most
16
of
the
general
operating
requirements,
but
the
bill
eliminates
17
references
to
innovation
zone
schools
and
broadens
the
list
of
18
entities
eligible
to
submit
applications
to
establish
charter
19
schools.
However,
the
bill
provides
that
a
charter
school
20
or
innovation
zone
school
established
prior
to
July
1,
2012,
21
shall
continue
to
be
governed
by
chapter
256F,
Code
and
Code
22
Supplement
2011,
until
the
term
of
the
contract
entered
into
23
pursuant
to
section
256F.6,
Code
2011,
ends.
24
ELIGIBLE
ENTITIES.
Eligible
entities
under
the
bill
25
include
the
following:
school
districts,
area
education
26
agencies,
community
colleges,
regents
universities,
nonprofit
27
private
postsecondary
institutions,
cities
and
counties
28
with
populations
of
more
than
100,000,
and
nonsectarian,
29
nonreligious,
tax-exempt
charitable
organizations;
or
30
consortiums
of
some
of
the
eligible
entities.
31
CONVERSION
OF
AN
EXISTING
SCHOOL.
The
bill
continues
to
32
provide
that
the
conversion
of
an
existing
school
district
33
attendance
center
must
be
supported
by
at
least
50
percent
34
of
the
school’s
teachers
and
50
percent
of
the
parents
whose
35
-144-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
144/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
children
attend
the
school.
1
The
bill
states
that
the
legislation
shall
not
be
construed
2
as
a
means
to
keep
open
a
school
that
a
school
board
decides
3
to
close,
but
a
school
board
may
endorse
or
authorize
the
4
establishing
of
a
charter
school
to
replace
the
school
the
5
board
decides
to
close.
Applicants
seeking
a
charter
under
6
this
circumstance
must
demonstrate
and
document
that
the
7
charter
sought
is
substantially
different
in
purpose
and
8
program
from
the
school
the
board
closes.
9
DUTIES
OF
THE
DEPARTMENT.
The
department
of
education
10
is
tasked
with
developing
and
implementing
an
orientation
11
program
for
operators
that
covers
accountability
requirements,
12
reporting
requirements,
and
finance.
An
operator
is
an
entity
13
whose
application
to
charter
a
school
has
been
approved
by
14
the
state
board.
An
operator
must
successfully
complete
the
15
orientation
program
prior
to
chartering
a
school.
If
the
16
operator
does
not
successfully
complete
the
orientation
program
17
in
the
time
specified
by
the
department,
the
state
board
18
shall
reevaluate
the
operator’s
application
and
may
deny
the
19
application.
20
The
department
must
also
develop
and
implement
or
approve
21
orientation
programs
for
members
of
the
boards
of
directors
22
of
charter
schools,
including
but
not
limited
to
orientation
23
on
the
charter
school
board’s
role
and
responsibilities,
24
employment
policies
and
practices,
and
financial
management.
25
Board
members
must
attend
ongoing
orientation
throughout
the
26
member’s
term.
27
The
department
shall
monitor
and
evaluate
the
fiscal,
28
operational,
and
student
performance
of
the
charter
school
29
annually,
and
may
for
this
purpose
annually
collect
from
a
30
charter
school
a
reasonable
fee
established
by
rule
by
the
31
state
board
based
on
the
number
of
students
who
are
enrolled
in
32
the
charter
school.
The
fee
structure
shall
be
stated
in
the
33
charter
school
contract.
Every
fifth
year
in
which
a
charter
34
school
is
in
operation,
and
before
the
state
board
considers
35
-145-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
145/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
renewing
a
charter
school’s
contract,
the
department
must
1
provide
to
the
state
board
and
to
the
charter
school
board
a
2
formal
written
review
of
the
annual
evaluations
conducted.
3
OPERATING
REQUIREMENTS.
New
operating
requirements
4
include
those
requiring
that
charter
schools
comply
with
5
statutes
relating
to
the
suspension
or
expulsion
of
a
student,
6
procedures
for
handling
child
abuse,
procedures
for
reporting
7
weapons
and
drug
or
alcohol
possession
or
use,
and
harassment
8
and
bullying
prohibitions
and
requirements;
comply
with
9
statutes
and
rules
relating
to
student
records
and
school
10
meal
programs;
submit
data
for
purposes
of
the
department’s
11
comprehensive
management
information
system;
and
comply
with
12
statewide
accountability
requirements
governing
high
school
13
graduation
requirements,
the
core
curriculum,
core
content
14
standards,
and
assessments.
Suspension
or
expulsion
decisions
15
may
be
appealed
to
the
state
board
of
education.
However,
16
under
the
bill
a
charter
school
no
longer
must
be
subject
to
or
17
comply
with
Code
chapter
279,
relating
to
teacher
contracts
and
18
discharge
of
teachers
or
administrators;
or
meet
the
180-day
19
school
year
requirement
or
its
equivalent
in
hours;
or
provide
20
school
bus
transportation
to
nonpublic
school
and
nonresident
21
students.
22
HOME
SCHOOL
PROHIBITION.
The
bill
prohibits
use
of
a
charter
23
school
as
a
method
of
providing
education
to
or
generating
24
revenue
for
students
who
are
receiving
competent
private
25
instruction.
26
PRIMARY
FOCUS.
The
primary
focus
of
a
charter
school
shall
27
be
to
provide
a
comprehensive
program
of
instruction
for
at
28
least
one
grade
or
age
group
from
5-21
years
of
age.
29
CHARTER
SCHOOL
APPLICATION.
An
application
to
operate
a
30
charter
school
must
include
a
business
plan
that
documents
the
31
proposed
charter
school’s
mission
statement,
school
purposes,
32
program
design,
graduation
plan,
financial
plan,
governance
33
and
management
structure,
and
background
and
experience
of
34
the
applicants
and
the
initial
board
and
instructional
staff,
35
-146-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
146/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
plus
any
other
information
the
state
board
requests;
provide
1
a
statement
of
assurances
of
legal
compliance
prescribed
by
2
the
state
board;
provide
a
statement
of
support
or
nonsupport
3
from
the
school
district
in
which
the
charter
school
would
4
be
located,
a
statement
of
community
support
and
need,
5
and
how
special
education
and
English
as
a
second
language
6
programs
will
be
made
available
and
financed;
demonstrate
7
the
applicant’s
ability
to
implement
the
procedures
and
8
satisfy
the
criteria
for
chartering
a
school;
and
describe
the
9
measures
that
will
be
implemented
to
provide
for
oversight
10
of
the
charter
school’s
academic,
financial,
and
operational
11
performance,
and
ensure
compliance
with
the
terms
of
any
12
written
contract
entered
into
by
the
charter
school
board
and
13
the
state
board.
An
applicant
must
file
a
separate
application
14
for
each
school
the
applicant
intends
to
charter.
15
The
bill
sets
forth
provisions
specifying
timelines
16
and
requirements
for
the
approval
or
disapproval
of
an
17
application.
Only
the
state
board
is
authorized
to
approve
18
an
application.
The
state
board
is
directed
to
establish
19
criteria
for
application
approval
that
at
a
minimum
considers
20
the
available
capacity
and
infrastructure
identified
in
the
21
plan,
the
contracting
process
specified
in
the
plan,
ongoing
22
oversight
and
evaluation
processes
relating
to
administration
23
and
staffing,
and
charter
school
contract
and
contract
renewal
24
criteria
and
processes.
25
The
approval
of
an
application
and
renewal
of
a
charter
by
26
the
state
board
shall
not
be
conditioned
upon
the
bargaining
27
unit
status
of
the
employees
of
the
school.
Employees
of
28
the
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
school
may,
if
otherwise
29
eligible,
organize
under
Code
chapter
20
and
comply
with
its
30
provisions.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
school
is
31
a
public
employer,
for
the
purposes
of
Code
chapter
20,
upon
32
formation
of
one
or
more
bargaining
units
at
the
school.
33
OPERATOR
OF
CHARTER
SCHOOL.
An
operator
who
successfully
34
completes
the
department’s
orientation
program
shall,
before
35
-147-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
147/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
entering
into
a
contract
or
other
agreement
for
professional
1
or
other
services,
goods,
or
facilities,
incorporate
as
a
2
nonprofit
corporation
and
shall
establish
an
initial
board
of
3
directors
composed
of
at
least
five
voting
members,
who
are
not
4
related
parties,
until
a
timely
election
for
members
of
the
5
ongoing
charter
school
board
of
directors
is
held
according
to
6
the
school’s
articles
and
bylaws.
7
CHARTER
SCHOOL
BOARD.
Ongoing
board
members
must
be
elected
8
before
the
school
completes
its
third
year
of
operation.
The
9
articles
and
bylaws
shall
include
clear
policies
regarding
10
conflicts
of
interests
and
standards
of
responsibility.
Staff
11
members
employed
at
the
school
and
all
parents
or
guardians
12
of
children
enrolled
in
the
school
are
the
voters
eligible
to
13
elect
charter
school
board
members.
14
The
charter
school
board
of
directors
shall
be
composed
15
of
at
least
one
licensed
teacher
employed
at
the
school,
at
16
least
one
parent
or
legal
guardian
of
a
student
enrolled
in
17
the
charter
school
who
is
not
an
employee
of
the
charter
18
school,
and
at
least
one
interested
community
member
who
is
19
not
employed
by
the
charter
school
and
does
not
have
a
child
20
enrolled
in
the
school.
The
majority
of
board
members
may
be
21
teachers.
Contractors
providing
facilities,
goods,
or
services
22
to
a
charter
school
shall
not
serve
on
the
charter
school
board
23
except
that
contracts
involving
no
more
than
$2,500
do
not
24
exclude
a
contractor
from
board
membership.
25
EXPANSION
TO
ADDITIONAL
SITES
OR
GRADES.
The
state
board
26
may
permit
the
charter
school
board
to
expand
the
operation
of
27
the
charter
school
to
additional
sites
or
to
add
additional
28
grades
at
the
school
beyond
those
described
in
the
operator’s
29
approved
application
only
after
submitting
to
the
state
board
a
30
supplemental
affidavit
that
includes
a
proposed
expansion
plan
31
that
demonstrates
need
and
projected
enrollment;
documentation
32
that
the
expansion
is
warranted,
at
a
minimum,
by
longitudinal
33
data
demonstrating
students’
improved
academic
performance
and
34
growth
on
student
assessments;
documentation
that
the
charter
35
-148-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
148/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
school
is
financially
sound
and
the
financing
it
needs
to
1
implement
the
proposed
expansion
exists;
and
documentation
that
2
the
charter
school
has
the
governance
structure
and
management
3
capacity
to
carry
out
its
expansion.
4
OPEN
MEETINGS
AND
RECORDS.
The
charter
school
board
is
a
5
government
or
governmental
body
for
purposes
of
Iowa’s
open
6
meetings
and
records
laws.
7
AUDIT
REQUIREMENTS.
As
under
current
law,
the
charter
8
school
must
comply
with
the
same
statutory
audit
requirements
9
as
a
school
district.
In
addition,
the
charter
school
must
10
annually
submit
an
audit
report
to
the
state
board
by
December
11
31
and
include
a
copy
of
all
charter
school
agreements
for
12
corporate
management
services.
If
the
audit
report
finds
13
that
a
material
weakness
exists
in
the
school’s
financial
14
reporting
systems,
the
school
shall
submit
a
written
report
to
15
the
state
board
explaining
how
the
material
weakness
will
be
16
resolved,
and
the
school’s
auditor
must
agree
to
make
available
17
information
about
the
audit
to
the
state
board
upon
request.
18
FUNDING.
A
student
enrolled
in
a
charter
school
shall
19
be
counted,
for
state
school
foundation
aid
purposes,
in
the
20
pupil’s
district
of
residence.
The
district
of
residence
shall
21
pay
to
the
charter
school
the
state
cost
per
pupil
for
the
22
previous
school
year
and
the
combined
district
cost
per
pupil,
23
the
teacher
salary
supplement,
the
professional
development
24
supplement,
and
the
early
intervention
supplement,
plus
any
25
moneys
received
for
the
student
as
a
result
of
the
non-English
26
speaking
weighting
for
the
previous
school
year
multiplied
27
by
the
state
cost
per
pupil
for
the
previous
year.
Other
28
per
pupil
moneys
may
also
be
payable
to
a
charter
school
in
29
accordance
with
the
charter
school’s
approved
application.
30
ADMISSION
REQUIREMENTS.
A
charter
school
may
limit
31
admission
to
the
following:
students
within
an
age
group
or
32
grade
level,
students
who
are
either
at
risk
of
dropping
out
or
33
have
dropped
out,
and
residents
of
a
specific
geographic
area
34
in
which
the
school
is
located
when
the
majority
of
students
35
-149-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
149/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
served
by
the
school
are
eligible
for
free
and
reduced
price
1
meals
under
federal
guidelines.
A
charter
school
shall
enroll
2
an
eligible
student
who
submits
a
timely
application,
unless
3
the
number
of
applications
exceeds
the
capacity
of
a
program,
4
class,
grade
level,
or
building.
In
such
case,
students
shall
5
be
accepted
by
lot.
A
charter
school
shall
give
enrollment
6
preference
to
a
sibling
of
an
enrolled
student
and
to
a
foster
7
child
of
that
student’s
parents
and
may
give
preference
for
8
enrolling
children
of
the
school’s
staff
before
accepting
other
9
students
by
lot.
A
charter
school
shall
not
limit
admission
10
to
students
on
the
basis
of
intellectual
ability,
measures
11
of
achievement
or
aptitude,
or
athletic
ability
and
may
not
12
establish
any
criteria
or
requirements
for
admission
that
are
13
inconsistent
with
this
Code
section.
The
charter
school
shall
14
not
distribute
any
services
or
goods
of
value
to
students,
15
parents,
or
guardians
as
an
inducement,
term,
or
condition
of
16
enrolling
a
student
in
a
charter
school.
17
STAFFING
REQUIREMENTS
AND
QUALIFICATIONS.
A
charter
school
18
shall
employ
or
contract
with
necessary
licensed
teachers
19
who
hold
endorsements
to
perform
the
particular
service
for
20
which
they
are
employed
in
the
school.
The
school
may
employ
21
necessary
employees
who
are
not
required
to
hold
teaching
22
licenses
to
perform
duties
other
than
teaching
and
may
contract
23
for
other
services.
24
LEASE
OF
SPACE
AND
FACILITY
CONSTRUCTION.
A
charter
25
school
may
lease
space
from
a
school
district
or
other
public
26
organization;
a
private,
nonprofit
nonsectarian
organization;
27
a
private
property
owner;
or
a
sectarian
organization
if
the
28
leased
space
is
constructed
as
a
school
facility.
29
A
charter
school
may
organize
an
affiliated
nonprofit
30
building
corporation
to
renovate
or
purchase
an
existing
31
facility
to
serve
as
a
school
or
to
construct
a
new
school
32
facility.
The
bill
sets
forth
requirements
for
such
a
33
corporation.
34
RETIREMENT
SYSTEMS.
Teachers
in
a
charter
school
are
public
35
-150-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
150/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
school
teachers
and
charter
schools
are
employers
for
the
1
purposes
of
Iowa
public
employees’
retirement
system.
2
CONTRACT
RENEWAL
OR
NONRENEWAL.
The
state
board
may
or
3
may
not
renew
a
charter
school
contract
at
the
end
of
the
4
contract
term,
and
may
unilaterally
terminate
a
contract
during
5
the
term
of
the
contract,
for
any
of
the
following
grounds:
6
failure
to
meet
the
requirements
for
student
performance
7
contained
in
the
contract,
failure
to
meet
generally
accepted
8
standards
of
fiscal
management,
violations
of
law,
and
other
9
good
cause
shown,
including
but
not
limited
to
the
existence
10
of
one
or
more
other
grounds
for
revocation
as
specified
in
11
the
contract.
The
bill
specifies
the
procedures
for
not
12
renewing
or
terminating
a
contract.
The
state
board,
after
13
providing
reasonable
notice
to
the
charter
school
board,
and
14
after
providing
an
opportunity
for
a
public
hearing,
may
15
terminate
the
existing
contract
with
the
charter
school
board
16
if
the
charter
school
has
a
history
of
failure
to
meet
student
17
performance
requirements
consistent
with
state
law,
financial
18
mismanagement
or
failure
to
meet
generally
accepted
standards
19
of
fiscal
management,
or
violations
of
the
law.
20
If
a
contract
is
not
renewed
or
is
terminated,
a
student
21
who
attended
the
charter
school
may
enroll
in
the
district
of
22
residence
or
may
submit
an
open
enrollment
application
to
a
23
nonresident
district.
The
charter
school
shall
transfer
the
24
student’s
educational
records
to
the
student’s
new
school
of
25
enrollment.
26
LEGAL
AUTHORITY.
The
board
of
directors
of
a
charter
school
27
may
sue
and
be
sued,
the
charter
school
shall
not
levy
taxes
28
or
issue
bonds,
and
a
charter
school
is
a
municipality
for
29
purposes
of
tort
liability
of
governmental
subdivisions.
30
DIVISION
XVI
——
THIRD
GRADE
LITERACY.
The
bill
provides
for
31
early
grade
student
assessments
for
reading
deficiencies
and
32
parental
notification
of
reading
deficiencies,
and
retention
33
for
such
deficiencies
at
grade
three
for
students
who
do
not
34
demonstrate
an
acceptable
level
of
performance
on
reading
35
-151-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
151/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
standardized
or
alternative
assessments.
1
The
bill
requires
the
state
board
of
education
to
adopt
2
guidelines
by
July
1,
2013,
for
implementation
of
the
new
3
Code
provision
established
by
the
bill
relating
to
student
4
progression,
retention,
and
remedial
instruction,
including
5
but
not
limited
to
basic
levels
of
reading
proficiency
6
on
approved
assessments
and
identification
of
tools
that
7
school
districts
may
use
in
evaluating
and
reevaluating
any
8
student
who
may
be
or
who
is
determined
to
be
deficient
in
9
reading,
including
but
not
limited
to
initial
assessments
and
10
subsequent
assessments,
alternative
assessments,
and
portfolio
11
reviews.
The
state
board
must
adopt
standards
that
provide
a
12
reasonable
expectation
that
a
student’s
progress
toward
reading
13
proficiency
is
sufficient
to
master
appropriate
grade
four
14
level
reading
skills
prior
to
the
student’s
promotion
to
grade
15
four.
16
The
director
of
the
department
of
education
is
required
to
17
identify
the
scoring
levels
on
approved
grade
three
reading
18
assessments
that
will
trigger
the
retention
of
a
student;
to
19
develop
or
identify
and
approve
alternative
but
equivalent
20
qualifying
performance
measures
for
students
who
are
not
21
proficient
in
reading,
such
as
a
demonstration
of
reading
22
mastery
evidenced
by
portfolios
of
student
work;
and
to
23
establish,
subject
to
an
appropriation
of
state
funds,
an
Iowa
24
reading
research
center
for
the
application
of
current
research
25
on
literacy.
26
School
districts
must
provide
intensive
reading
instruction
27
to
students
who
exhibit
a
substantial
deficiency
in
reading,
28
based
upon
locally
determined
or
statewide
assessments
29
conducted
in
kindergarten
or
grade
one,
grade
two,
or
grade
30
three,
or
through
teacher
observations.
The
student’s
reading
31
proficiency
shall
be
reassessed
following
the
intensive
reading
32
instruction.
The
student
shall
continue
to
be
provided
with
33
intensive
reading
instruction
until
the
reading
deficiency
is
34
remedied.
35
-152-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
152/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
School
districts
must
notify
at
least
annually,
in
writing,
1
the
parent
or
guardian
of
a
student
who
exhibits
a
substantial
2
deficiency
in
reading,
the
district’s
determination
that
3
the
child
is
deficient
in
reading,
descriptions
of
the
4
services
currently
provided
to
the
child
and
of
the
proposed
5
supplemental
instructional
services
and
supports
that
the
6
school
district
will
provide
to
the
child
to
remediate
the
7
deficiency;
that
if
the
child’s
reading
deficiency
is
not
8
remediated
by
the
end
of
grade
three,
the
child
will
be
9
retained
unless
exempt
from
mandatory
retention
for
good
cause;
10
strategies
for
parents
and
guardians
to
use
in
helping
the
11
child
succeed
in
reading
proficiency;
that
the
assessment
12
is
not
the
sole
determiner
of
promotion
and
that
additional
13
evaluations,
portfolio
reviews,
performance
measures,
and
14
assessments
are
available
to
assist
parents
and
the
school
15
district
in
knowing
when
a
child
is
reading
at
or
above
grade
16
level
and
ready
for
promotion;
and
the
district’s
specific
17
criteria
and
policies
for
midyear
promotion.
“Midyear
18
promotion”,
under
the
bill,
means
promotion
of
a
retained
19
student
to
the
next
grade
level
at
any
time
during
the
year
of
20
retention
once
the
student
has
demonstrated
ability
to
read
at
21
grade
level.
22
The
bill
does
not
preclude
the
parent
or
guardian
of
a
23
student
with
a
reading
deficiency
from
requesting
that
the
24
student
be
retained
at
grade
level.
25
If
a
student’s
reading
deficiency
is
not
remedied
by
the
26
end
of
grade
three,
the
student
shall
be
retained
in
grade
27
three.
The
school
district
can
exempt
students
from
mandatory
28
retention
for
good
cause,
which
under
the
bill
includes
29
limited
English
proficient
students;
students
requiring
special
30
education;
students
who
demonstrate
an
acceptable
level
of
31
performance
on
an
approved
alternative
performance
measure;
32
students
who
demonstrate
mastery
through
a
student
portfolio;
33
and
students
who
have
received
intensive
remediation
in
reading
34
for
two
or
more
years.
35
-153-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
153/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
Intensive
reading
instruction
for
students
promoted
under
1
good
cause
must
include
an
altered
instructional
day
that
2
includes
specialized
diagnostic
information
and
specific
3
reading
strategies
for
each
student,
and
the
school
district
4
must
assist
attendance
centers
and
teachers
to
implement
5
reading
strategies.
6
If
a
student
demonstrates
acceptable
performance
through
7
an
alternative
assessment
or
student
portfolio,
the
student’s
8
teacher
must
document
the
teacher’s
recommendation
for
9
promotion
to
the
school
principal,
and
if
the
principal
agrees,
10
the
principal
must
make
a
recommendation
to
the
district
11
superintendent.
A
parent
or
guardian
may
appeal
the
decision
12
of
the
superintendent
to
the
school
board,
but
the
school
13
board’s
decision
is
final.
14
Each
school
district
shall
conduct
a
review
of
student
15
progress
for
any
student
retained
who
did
not
meet
the
16
criteria
for
a
good
cause
exemption.
The
review
shall
address
17
additional
supports
and
services
needed
to
remediate
the
18
identified
areas
of
reading
deficiency.
The
school
district
19
shall
require
a
student
portfolio
to
be
completed
for
each
such
20
student.
21
The
intensive
supports
that
a
school
district
must
provide
22
free
of
charge
include
a
minimum
of
a
90-minute
block
of
23
scientific-research-based
reading
instruction
and
other
24
strategies
which
may
include
but
are
not
limited
to
small
group
25
instruction;
reduced
teacher-student
ratios;
more
frequent
26
progress
monitoring;
tutoring
or
mentoring;
transition
classes
27
containing
students
in
grades
three
and
four;
extended
school
28
day,
week,
or
year;
and
summer
reading
programs.
29
At
regular
intervals,
the
school
district
shall
provide
30
a
report
to
the
parent
or
guardian
apprising
the
parent
or
31
guardian
of
academic
and
other
progress
being
made
by
the
32
student
and
giving
other
useful
information.
33
The
school
district
shall
implement
a
policy
for
the
midyear
34
promotion
of
a
student
who
can
demonstrate
that
the
student
is
35
-154-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
154/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
a
successful
and
independent
reader,
reading
at
or
above
grade
1
level,
and
ready
to
be
promoted
to
grade
four.
2
In
addition
to
required
reading
enhancement
and
acceleration
3
strategies,
school
districts
must
provide
parents
and
guardians
4
of
retained
students
with
instructional
options
such
as
a
plan
5
outlined
in
a
parental
contract,
including
participation
in
6
regular
parent-guided
home
reading.
7
School
districts,
using
early
intervention
moneys
received
8
from
the
state,
must
also
establish
a
reading
enhancement
9
and
acceleration
development
initiative
designed
to
prevent
10
the
retention
of
grade
three
students
and
to
offer
intensive
11
accelerated
reading
instruction
to
grade
three
students
12
who
fail
to
meet
standards
for
promotion
to
grade
four
and
13
to
each
kindergarten
through
grade
three
student
who
is
14
assessed
as
exhibiting
a
reading
deficiency.
The
bill
amends
15
Code
section
256D.2A
to
authorize
use
of
the
state
early
16
intervention
moneys
on
such
initiatives.
The
initiative
shall
17
be
provided
to
all
kindergarten
through
grade
three
students
18
at
risk
of
retention,
and
shall
measure
phonemic
awareness,
19
phonics,
fluency,
vocabulary,
and
comprehension;
be
provided
20
during
regular
school
hours
in
addition
to
regular
reading
21
instruction;
and
provide
a
reading
curriculum
that
meets
the
22
state
board’s
guidelines
and,
at
a
minimum,
assists
students
23
in
developing
the
ability
to
read
at
grade
level;
provides
24
skill
development
in
phonemic
awareness,
phonics,
fluency,
25
vocabulary,
and
comprehension;
includes
scientifically
based
26
and
reliable
assessment;
and
provides
initial
and
ongoing
27
analysis
of
each
student’s
reading
progress;
is
implemented
28
during
regular
school
hours;
and
provides
a
curriculum
in
core
29
academic
subjects
to
assist
the
student
in
maintaining
or
30
meeting
proficiency
levels
for
the
appropriate
grade
in
all
31
academic
subjects.
32
Each
school
district
shall
report
to
the
department
33
the
specific
intensive
reading
interventions
and
supports
34
implemented
by
the
school
district,
and
shall
report
on
the
35
-155-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
155/
156
S.F.
_____
H.F.
_____
number
of
students
retained
under
the
provisions
of
the
bill.
1
Finally,
each
school
district
shall
provide
a
retained
2
student
who
has
received
intensive
instructional
services
but
3
is
still
not
ready
for
grade
promotion
the
option
of
being
4
placed
in
a
transitional
instructional
setting
specifically
5
designed
to
produce
learning
gains
sufficient
to
meet
grade
6
four
performance
standards
while
continuing
to
remediate
the
7
areas
of
reading
deficiency.
8
DIVISION
XVII
——
STATE
MANDATE.
The
bill
may
include
a
state
9
mandate
as
defined
in
Code
section
25B.3.
The
bill
requires
10
that
the
state
cost
of
any
state
mandate
included
in
the
bill
11
be
paid
by
a
school
district
from
state
school
foundation
aid
12
received
by
the
school
district
under
Code
section
257.16.
The
13
specification
is
deemed
to
constitute
state
compliance
with
14
any
state
mandate
funding-related
requirements
of
Code
section
15
25B.2.
16
-156-
LSB
5398XL
(18)
84
kh/rj
156/
156